Home

M-Series User Manual

1. Composite R1 amp P poss SDIRI amp PIS S ET R2 amp P E MON O p P1 OUT P1 our I R1IN P1OUT P1 OUT foun ING 20UT P2OUT R2IN aes Our 35 OUT Cmpst ee SS SSTSTGO JOO GOOG SFIS YI NS LH W r ad 2 CH2 23 M Series User Manual Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR M 222D M 322D Recorder input connections Recorder 1 Inputs R1 Video CMPSTR1 amp Pi_ SDIRI amp P1 _ _ AES EBU R1 amp P1 Composite R1IN P10UT R1IN P1OUT1 P1OUT21 CH1 2 CH3 4 l CH 1 2 H 3 4 l AAE OO Se a ANN Digital Audio O Co e SSO AUD MON OUT 58 SDIR2 amp P2 NAERU R2 amp P2 aY aa Yolo FOO B58 CJ e A oa a ie ose OL6 26262686 2000 l 50805 6 6 oaa aCeCe OBO BOBO ROZOROKOQOBOS FRONT PANEL A VGA RS422 PORT 1 PORT 2 SCSI Analog ae Channel 1 fem ih Channel 2 Recorder 2 Inputs R2 AUD MON OUT z SDIR2 amp P2 2 OUT R2IN P U aV g AA ok 11 CH1
2. 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 69 Chapter 3 Product Description 70 Guide to using AppCenter At power up the Windows operating system starts automatically logs on and then automatically launches AppCenter the main user interface AppCenter is a built in video disk recorder application that provides a single interface for tasks such as configuration clip management media transfers channel monitoring system monitoring and record and playback control R1 Recorder P1 Player N R2 Recorder P2 Player AIRAA am lt A oN 14 30 05 26 14 19 37 10 14 30 05 26 14 20 56 27 Clip_1 Clip_2 Clip_5 Clip_11 Recorder R1 Player Recorder Player Clip Clip_1 i Location Y default In Out Length 14 00 00 00 14 45 00 04 00 45 00 04 New Clip Preview Properties 00 29 30 24 v A1 A2 4 ED Recorder 1 Clip_1 recording Starting AppCenter There are two ways of restarting AppCenter e At power up the Windows operating system starts automatically logs on using the mseries user account password mseries and then automatically launches AppCenter e Double click the AppCenter shortcut on the Windows desktop M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 AppCenter control options AppCenter control options OO O10 OOOO om OLSSON OO Goo
3. Refer to the Profile XP System Guide to make cable connections Configure the iVDR static IP address This procedure guides you to the relevant steps to configure a static IP address on the 1VDR It is assumed that you understand Ethernet networks in general and that you can apply that understanding to configure this network setting using standard Windows tools If you need help with these procedures contact your network administrator To set up the static IP address on the 100BaseT adapter 1 If you normally operate your M Series iVDR using the optional Front Panel touch screen you should connect keyboard and mouse before proceeding You will likely find it easier to configure your network using a keyboard and mouse rather than the touch screen Refer to Keyboard mouse and VGA monitor connections on page 26 You may need to restart Windows to make the mouse and keyboard operational 2 Shut down AppCenter as follows a In the AppCenter toolbar select System then choose Shutdown in the pop up menu The Shutdown dialog box appears b Using the drop down list choose Exit to Windows then select OK AppCenter shuts down and the Windows desktop appears 48 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 100BaseT Configuration tVDR and Profile XP streaming CAUTION The M Series is not a general purpose Windows A workstation The Windows configuration on the iVDR has
4. Connect to Rear Panel Keyboard Mouse and Monitor Remote Control Protocol on ca Remote Control A 2C Ja GPI Control Protocols over RS 422 Front Panel BVW AMP VDCP Mounted or Desktop Local Control Keyboard mouse and monitor Connecting a keyboard monitor and mouse to the i1VDR rear panel provides access to AppCenter You can use a mouse and keyboard shortcuts to control the 1iVDR Front Panel The optional Front Panel comes mounted on the front of the chassis however it can be removed and operated remotely using an optional front panel accessory kit which includes a 15 foot extension cable and front panel cradle See Guide to using the Front Panel on page 83 USB connectors on the edge of the Front Panel allow you to connect a USB device such as a disk memory stick mouse keyboard or transport control device The keyboard is used for text entry and provides keyboard shortcuts to control the iVDR A transport control device that emulates a keyboard can be used to control the 1VDR through keyboard shortcuts Remote Control 20 April 2005 GPI I O GPI input triggers can be assigned to channels to control actions such as record play stop and skip a playlist event GPI output triggers can
5. aaa f the Front Panel 5 option is installed csal refer to Enabling the VGA monitor output on page 86 USB mouse SERN Supplied with iVDR USB keyboard Supplied with iVDR VGA monitor Not supplied with iVDR 26 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Audio monitoring connections Connect audio monitor as shown AUD MON OUT CMPST R2 amp P2 SDIR2 amp P2 P2OUT R2IN P2OUT1 P2OUT2 CH 1 2 SSOSGBSOS6 AES EBU R2 amp P2 Audio monitoring connections H 3 4 H 1 2 4 QQ L55 FER Org GAC O ROKO OR OKO S sooo ooo 0L0 20802080 CL6L 626262626 CGE 6 PSP GPSS O O C6 P2 OUT a LOOP OQ OO GPI lt Left Ch1 lt j Right ZO soso Oso no One SO 5060 OKOKON OSOKO Ch2 Audio MON Out OO FRONT RS422 PANEL A PORT 1 PORT 2 VGA 20 April 2005 SCSI RS422 PORT 3 PORT 4 M 122A M222A Left Ch1 Right Ch2 ry i M 222D M322D M Series User Manual 27 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Reference Video connections Connect a reference video signal as shown The reference signal must be an analog composite signal You m
6. cccccccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaas 313 Adjusting rack mount brackets cccccseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaassseseeeeeeeess 314 Rear panel connector PIN OUTS ce ceeecee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaueeeeeeeeeaeaueeeecsseaaeeeeeessaaseeeees 315 RS 422 connector pinouts niin iessssaisndvvcaceedudswiesdsnesateatantedeccabsasvavedceccaessndacsevsacesarens 315 LTO CONNECCION DINOUIS seriinin tian savaubsusalinhinckesucaruniu ence oe 315 Analog audio connector pinouts secicsics ce incececsbetnccssee dene vacvudendexcenedststdatevebdebeesenisy 316 GPI I O connector pinouts 2 2 ccc2sc race ceseccet tic tee peesneelaceonnakines Smaceentieats eceeeactatees 316 LEE lt gt Gate een EA A cer Meee Rete ne ane ener eRe ee ene ee eee ee eee one 317 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual Contents 10 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Finding Information About this manual This user manual describes the M Series 1VDR and provides instructions for installing and operating the product in a variety of applications How this manual is organized This manual is organized around the tasks required to install configure and operate the M Series iVDR The following describes the chapters included in this manual Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Describes how to make rear panel connections and configure the 1VDR for basic operation Chapter 2 Quick Start Procedures Use these procedu
7. If you are using refer to Front Panel controls Guide to using the Front Panel on page 83 On screen transport controls Displaying on screen transport controls on page 78 Keyboard shortcuts Using Keyboard shortcuts on page 79 GPI input triggers Configuring GPI inputs on page 121 Selecting loop play Loop play mode plays the clip in a continuous loop until Stop is selected The Time Dome is used to enable disable loop play e Select the Time Dome P then choose Loop Play in the pop up menu 00 00 03 23 Locating a clip Selecting the Locate item in the Player context menu displays the bin where the clip is located in the Clips pane The Clips pane also becomes the active pane To locate a clip 1 With the clip loaded in Player select the Player context menu button then choose Locate 2 The Clips pane becomes active and displays the contents of the bin where the clip is located 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 167 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Jumping to a specific timecode The Goto dialog allows Player to jump to the specific clip timecode that you enter You can enter absolute timecode values based on recorded timecode or relative timecode values To jump to a specific timecode 1 With a clip loaded in the Player pane do one of the following e Select the Goto button in Play view PANTA e Select the Play view menu button then choose Goto AA
8. ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 260 Sending media to a file OF A AOVICE siena a e E a 262 SENGING MECia to aile ssie a a ideas coud cn dete cedeneedadsteest eee eee 262 Sending assets to another machine 2 0 0 cccceeeseeeecececeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeesaaeeseess 265 Guide to using the Transfer MOnitor ccccccscsseeeccceeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseseaaeesseees 267 Starling the Transfer MONMtOr ecseri a beni Lees 267 Transfer Monitor pages and DUuttOns cccccsesseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeas 267 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual Contents Viewing transfer jobs in Transfer MONItOr cccccsseseeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeesaees 269 Viewing detailed transfer job properties ccccceseecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeess 270 Aborting a transfer job lt s cuctncevncesczcus s cc sseciconessnsenseatt cy csentooegagsnlcceasesceeceacteeeeseeaee 271 Removing transfer jobs from the Completed list cccccsseeeceseeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeees 271 Viewing asset properties cececcccsssececeesseeeeceesseeccesseceeeeseeecsueeeesseseeessageesesssass 272 VIEWING clip properes cracinar ae aa 272 Viewing playlist properties cccccsseecccesssececceuseeeceeuseeeeceesseeesesseeeesageeeessegs 273 Viewing program properties cceccccsseseecceseeeccseseeecsuseececeauseeecseeseeesaneeeeessees 273 Viewing bin properties cceccccsssececceneeeeceesseeecceuseeeceeseeee
9. 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 211 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Managing sections in the list A list has as least one section and all events belong to a section Sections management tasks include the following Adding and removing sections on page 212 Renaming sections on page 213 Selecting the section end properties on page 213 Adding pause at the end of all section events on page 214 Removing pause at the end of all section events on page 215 Adding and removing sections A playlist has as least one section but can have up to 100 All events belong to a section and each section can have up to 1000 events To add a section In List view select the context menu button Ca then choose the Add Section The new section is inserted at the end of the list Use the Edit menu in the AppCenter toolbar or standard keyboard shortcuts to Copy Cut or Paste a section When you paste the section it is inserted after the currently selected section NOTE You can paste a section that you copied from a list running on the other play channel To remove a section perform one of the following and choose Select the section in the list then select the context menu button Remove or Use the Edit menu in the AppCenter toolbar or standard keyboard shortcuts to Cut a section Select the section in List view then select the Remove button in the List view toolbar This butto
10. Clicking the up arrow button moves up one directory level in the storage hierarchy 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 263 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane The Save in drop down list allows you to choose from one of the most recent target locations used history NOTE You must format CD R RW and DVD disks before use The iVDR includes the software for doing this formatting Refer to Formatting CD R RW and DVD disks on page 93 Also make sure that the asset can fit on the media type you ve chosen by checking asset properties See Viewing asset properties on page 272 4 Use the File Type drop down list to select the file type SMPTE 360M gxf or AVI DV avi 5 Change the destination file name using the File Name File Name MyClip__ edit control if needed 6 Select the settings tab then specify export settings AVI file settings Interleaved or Non Interleaved Send V default Clip_1 x Destination File Settings k Bin AVI file setting Interleaved Stream Won Interleaved Cancel 7 Select Send NOTE Send to file is a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor See Guide to using the Transfer Monitor on page 267 to view the job status If the operation fails for any reason the asset is deleted from the target location 264 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Sending assets to another machine Sending assets to another ma
11. Select the audio input digital models only You must select the audio input on iVDR models equipped with digital audio inputs To select the audio input of each record channel 1 Select System and choose Configuration then select the Channel button 2 Select the R1 or R2 tab and open the Audio Input link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link 3 Locate the question What is your audio input type 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 35 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Configuration for iVDR 1 IRI MPi gt f Ra J System S7 Audio Input What is your audio input type Analog AES SDI Embedded Group 1 Group 1 Group 2 Missing r Cancel 4 Make selections as follows e Analog records the analog audio connected to the record channel s analog audio input e AES records the AES EBU digital audio connected to the record channel s AES EBU audio input e SDI Embedded records the embedded audio signal on the Record channel s SDI input When you select SDI Embedded you must also select an embedded audio group through 4 as shown in the diagram A warning message is displayed when no signal is detected for the audio input you select NOTE Audio ts output simultaneously on all audio outputs When using embedded audio you must ensure that the correct embedded audio group is selected for each play channel You can disable embedde
12. 20 April 2005 Information in this chapter includes Using Configuration Manager Selecting the video standard Setting the audio reference level Selecting Time of day source for event scheduling Selecting video compression Record channel settings Play channel settings Configuring GPI inputs outputs Configuring the Monitor pane display Front Panel settings Adding and removing network host names M Series User Manual 97 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Using Configuration Manager Configuration Manager is the primary configuration tool for the 1VDR It makes settings that apply to the overall iVDR system as well as settings that apply to individual channels Configuration Manager settings are stored in a database The 1VDR s current configuration is always based on the settings saved in the database When the iVDR starts up it reads the settings from the database and configures itself accordingly When you modify a setting in Configuration Manager you must save the setting in order to update the database and reconfigure the 1VDR You can also save Configuration Manager settings as configuration files Configuration files are generated by the Configuration Manager application as stand alone XML files You can save settings out of Configuration Manager into a configuration file Likewise you can load settings into Configuration Manager from a configura
13. 20 April 2005 To view the properties of a clip loaded in Recorder In the Record pane do one of the following e Select the Properties button OF Lee A five sQ e Select the menu button then choose Properties nar NOTE To learn more about the Clip Properties dialog box Viewing clip properties on page 272 Name Clip_3 i ji Type Clip General Location vs newsclips Tracks video 1 Audio 2 TC 1 Format NTSC Hon DropFrame Compression D25 Size 36 MEytes Length 00 00 07 000 Created OF f29 03 09 18 4M Modified OF 3003 01 57 PM Locked Cancel M Series User Manual 155 Chapter 6 Recording Clips Locating a clip You can locate the currently loaded clip by displaying the contents of the current bin in the Clips pane The Clips pane also becomes the active pane To locate a clip 1 After or during recording select the context menu button in the Recorder pane then choose Locate 2 The Clips pane becomes active and displays the contents of the bin where the clip is located Displaying available storage space You can display available storage using the Time Dome To display available storage 1 Select the Time Dome Q i The Time Dome pop up menu appears 2 Choose Available Storage in the pop up menu X The Time Dome changes to display progress and available storage D 00 29 30 24 Available storage displayed is based on the video data rat
14. Full screen mode expands the Monitor pane to cover the applications pane enlarging the monitor pane area for easier viewing Full screen mode has two views multiple channel view or single channel view To view the Monitor pane in full screen mode 1 In the AppCenter toolbar select Monitor 2 In the AppCenter toolbar select the full screen m button at the bottom of the toolbar 3 The Monitor pane expands to fill the AppCenter window 4 Double click anywhere in the Monitor display to switch between single channel and multiple channel display mode Full screen multiple channel view R1 Recorder P1 Player s 14 34 05 01 14 19 37 10 lt n clip loaded gt Control Erano E aa20 59 283 a dim c ai ae jij 1 14 20 55 021 Recorder 1 No clip loaded 134 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Selecting the default full screen view Full screen single channel view 14 36 37 02 lt na clip laaded Recorder 1 No clip loaded Selecting the default full screen view The default full screen view is the view used by in the Monitor pane when you first select the Full Screen button You can set the default view to either multiple channel view or single channel view Refer to Front Panel settings on page 126 to configure the default full screen view Toggling between multiple and single channel views To toggle between views do one of the following e In multiple channel view double c
15. Note Refer to display brightness control and touch panel calibration procedures in this manual as needed 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 83 Chapter 3 Product Description Using Front Panel controls The following table describes how to use the Front Panel to perform simple tasks Front Panel Task Customized Operation Control VGA display Used to operate AppCenter the M SeriesiVDR graphic Without the optional front and touch user interface panel the 1VDR can be screen operated using a VGA monitor mouse and keyboard Brightness Adjust VGA display brightness Located on the back of Control the front panel module Record Hold down PLAY then press REC gt 144 Stop Press STOP to stop Record Play Play Press PLAY to start playback Rewind Hold down REW then release the button to cause the clip to return to the previous mode You can change to pressing Record only Selectable rewind speed Fast Forward Hold down FF then release the button m M4 cE gt i gt gt i 144 Jog Shuttle Knob Selection to cause the clip to return to the previous mode Cue to end Hold down STOP then press FF Frame advance Tap and release the FF button Cue to beginning Hold down STOP then press REW Frame reverse Tap and release the REW button Jog Press JOG then turn knob
16. Shift Arrow left Mark Point controls For this action Press Set mark in I Set mark out O Clear mark in Ctrl I Clear mark out Ctrl O Miscellaneous controls Action Press Copy Ctrl C Cut Ctrl X Paste Ctrl V 80 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Using Keyboard shortcuts Action Press Display split screen mode with Monitor pane Display split screen mode with Clips pane Open online help List controls The following shortcuts are used to control lists such as text view in Clips pane or Playlist s List view Action Press Select previous item in list Up arrow Select next item in list Down arrow Scroll to previous page Page Up Scroll to next page Page Down Scroll to top of list Home Scrolls to bottom of list End Delete current selection Delete Backspace 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 81 Chapter 3 Product Description Playlist controls Action Press Next event Shift S Ctrl S Ctrl Arrow right Previous event Shift A Ctrl A Ctrl Arrow left Next section Shift Ctrl S Shift Ctrl Arrow right Previous section Shift Ctrl A Shift Ctrl Arrow left Goto an event Hold down the Alt key while clicking the event Accessing the Windows desktop You can minimize AppCenter interface when you need access to the Windows
17. Stop playback or record of assigned channel Rewind Rewind playback of assigned channel Channel will stay in rewind mode until the beginning of clip is reached or another transport action is taken Fast forward Fast forward playback of assigned channel Channel will stay in the fast forward mode until the end of clip is reached or another transport action is taken Eject Ejects the current clip Preview The current clip in the record channel is loaded in the corresponding play channel NOTE You can use Eject prior to Preview if a clip is already loaded in the Play channel Cue start Cue to start of clip loaded in Player or Playlist channel Cue next event Goes to next event in a Playlist and stops Cue previous event Goes to previous event in a Playlist and stops Cue next section Goes to next section in a Playlist and stops Cue previous section Goes to previous section in a Playlist and stops 6 Select the active signal high or low required This is determined by the external equipment connected to the GPI input 7 Repeat step 3 through step 6 for the remaining GPI inputs 8 Select OK on the Configuration dialog or leave the Configuration Manager open to configure other 1VDR settings Configuring GPI outputs You can assign GPI outputs to channels in the 1VDR Once GPI outputs are assigned to a channel you can use them in playlists to trigger external eq
18. video 1 Audio 2 TC 1 NTSC DropFrame Dyes 2390 MBytes 00 11 01 235 05 27 03 04 28 PM 05 27 03 04 39 PM Cancel 3 Select General then select the Locked check box to lock the asset 4 Select OK to close the Properties dialog M Series User Manual 241 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Working with the Recycle Bin Topics in this section e Viewing the Recycle Bin contents on page 242 e Emptying the Recycle Bin on page 242 e Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 242 Viewing the Recycle Bin contents e Inthe Clips pane select the Current Bin label then select Recycle Bin The Recycle Bin assets are displayed in the asset list as the current bin You can work with assets in the Recycle Bin just like any other bin See About the asset context menu on page 226 Emptying the Recycle Bin 1 In the Clips pane select the Current Bin label then select the Organize Bins 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box select Recycle Bin from the bin list 3 Select Empty then Yes in to confirm 4 Close the Organize Bins dialog Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting 1 In the Clips pane select the Current Bin label then select the Organize Bins 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box choose Recycle Bin Organize Bins ERr ep Recycle Bin V New Bin Type Bin amp Recycle Bin F Explore Items 27 m SPOTS R it p a E m default Current sane del
19. AES EBU R2 amp P2 E J Cera CH1 n CH2 Oa LTC Cie Were CH1 Video ps pax PT a vasa avy ie OVO Composite P e e oe SDI i m Digital Audio WE e es Timecode S I m FRONT PANEL VGA RS422 PORT 1 PORT 2 SCSI Analog audio Channel 1 L Channel 2 R 24 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 M 222D M 322D Player output connections M 222D M 322D Player output connections Vi d eo CMPST R1 amp P1 a van as a a g eee puts Te AUD MON OUT CMPST 3 eas Sb ooo oa eS Noo eG Te oa 6 oy k 5 4 5 4 Soosi A q m eyes Tae O A A SDI 50000 0 0 o 000000005 000003000005000005 El 2 il Digital Audio e 4 t Q Timecode gt Th MT mae fea PT Analog audio Channel 1 L A pm Channel 2 R Player 2 Outputs P2 a R2IN P2OUT1 P2OUT2 CH1 H 3 H 1 2 Video SHSSEOSS Sy OGHSEO SES ee oa CMPSTR1 amp P1 SDIRI amp PI AES EBU R1 amp P1 AUD MON OUT CMPSTR2 amp P2 SDIR2 amp P2 AES EBU R2 amp P2 or Fe
20. Selecting the control port and iii control mode on page 282 Help Opens online help Options Help Thumbnail Used to visually identify the current clip loaded in Player When a AMP and VDCP protocols are used the thumbnail includes the current and preview clip You can click or touch the thumbnail image to toggle between the preview and current clip thumbnails This allows you to identify the preview clip before it plays Generally the preview clip begins playing after the current clip completes at which point the preview clip becomes the current clip Time Dome This multi function control displays play progress or play progress Progress with media marks which shows the relative position of mark in 8 only mark out points in the clip The timecode underneath indicates play 00 00 03 23 time remaining Progress The Time Dome is also used to enable and indicate loop play mode gt with media marks You must temporarily switch to Local Control mode then select and aE hold the Time Dome and select Loop Play in the pop up menu Progress amp loop play 00 00 08 21 enabled Protocol Monitor Button Appears when a channel is configured for remote control using a remote control protocol applications The button flashes when the application is successfully receiving serial control protocol commands Selecting the button opens the Protocol Monitor pane used to monitor command activity See Monitoring remote control
21. The StatusPane is used to view detailed system messages including status warning and error messages The StatusPane provides a central message area where status messages are listed as they are continually read from a logging database on the iVDR system drive The StatusPane also includes subsystem status indicators and the StatusPane menu button The subsystem status indicators display a red X when an alert message for the subsystem is listed in the StatusPane A yellow X is displayed when a warning messages 1s listed StatusPane Topics e Opening the StatusPane e Showing 1VDR software versions e Copying messages to the clip board e Clearing messages e Closing the StatusPane e Exporting log files Opening the StatusPane e To open the StatusPane click the StatusPane button pa in the AppCenter StatusBar The StatusPane is displayed where you can view messages Subsystem Status Indicators Oe eee StatusPane Menu local v System Video Timing Thermal Storage gt Audio wll All l y 3 Status a S NM X a E i 8 19 2003 1 30 49 PM Chassis Scrollable Message Details Front panel installed Message Area 9 19 2003 2 11 38 PM Timing Message Reference not present Details External video reference signal not detected I O might not be synchronous Check reference source 8 19 2003 2 11 38 PM Timing Message Reference lost Details Lost external video reference lock I O migh
22. grass valley M Series INTELLIGENT VIDEO DIGITAL RECORDER C q 071 8327 01 APRIL 2005 DOODOQOOOCOCOCCOCOC OOOO OOOOO0O0CCO NOOOOQOOANDOAODODOAOAc LI SOOOOC mom vnemom E A A THOMSON BRAND 2 Copyright Trademarks Disclaimer U S Government Restricted Rights Legend Revision Status M Series User Manual Copyright 2005 Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America This document may not be copied in whole or in part or otherwise reproduced except as specifically permitted under U S copyright law without the prior written consent of Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 Grass Valley M Series Profile and Profile XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc in the United States and or other countries Other trademarks used in this document are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the associated products Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Additional information regarding Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc trademarks and other proprietary rights may be found at www thomsongrassvalley com Product options and specifications subject to change without notice The information in this manual is furnished for info
23. 6 dB and 3 dB Input Return Loss gt 40 dB to 5 MHz Unlocked internal clock accuracy When not locked to a reference 27Mhz will be within 25PPM a M Series User Manual Internal reference provides accurate free running timing signals in the absence of genlock reference to allow asynchronous record and play 20 April 2005 System Timing System Timing Characteristics Description Nominal Playback Output Delay Adjustable Default Zero timed to reference Output Delay Range Independent for each play channel Frames NTSC 0 to 1 frames PAL 0 to 3 frames Lines NTSC 525 lines 0 to 524 lines PAL 625 lines 0 to 624 lines Samples NTSC 525 lines 0 to 1715 clock samples PAL 625 lines 0 to 1727 clock samples Analog sub pixels SC gt analog video only Range is slightly more than one sample clock period Nominal E to E Output Delay NA E to E is provided for monitoring purposes only not intended as a program switch a All delay values shown are relative to Black Reference i Output delay adjustments affect the SDI and composite analog outputs together The analog sub pixel adjustment is only a fine trim on the composite output with respect to the current SDI timing AES EBU Digital Audio Parameter Specification Standard SMPTE 276M 1995 Audio Inputs 4 channels per record channel two channels per BNC connector
24. Analog composite input settings NTSC with Pedestal 7 5 IRE Use Automatic gain control Cancel 3 Make your automatic gain control setting 4 Change other settings as necessary in the Configuration dialog box then select OK to save and apply all changes at once 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 109 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Configuring the VITC reader Use the following procedure if you have VITC timecode embedded in the video signal If you use LTC timecode exclusively this procedure does not apply To configure VITC reader 1 Inthe AppCenter toolbar select System Configuration then Channel and either the R1 or R2 tab 2 Open the Video Input link 3 Scroll to locate the question What lines should be used to read VITC timecode Configuration for iVDR 1 X R1 kE Ee eee Y ITC timecode is present What lines should be used to read timecode Detect VITC signal automatically Look for timecode between lines Default Cancel 4 Select the VITC reader setting as follows e Detect VITC signal automatically Select this option then use the sliders or number entry controls to enter the range of lines you want the system to search for VITC Automatic detection works in most cases unless two pairs of VITC signals are present and possibly interleaved Detect VITC signal automatically Look for timecode between lines v 6 22 RHE ea ee Ret Rae ay es
25. List view in image display mode P 00 00 51 05 Insert Properties Goto Player 2 Stopped List_1 Section 1 Clip_3 Event List Image View Time Domes display list and section play progress 188 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 Guide to using Playlist List View Control Description and User Operation List Timecode 07 07 25 716 Though each play event contains the timecode information from its source clip the timecode for the list is generated internally This timecode can be an offset from a specific timecode the default is 01 00 00 00 Selecting the playlist timecode on page 216 Section Text View oO Section 1 Section Image View 4 Section 1 A list has as least one section but can have up to 100 All events belong to a section and each section can have up to 1000 events In Image View the section is displayed as a Time Dome which shows the amount of the section that has played An empty Time Dome indicates the section has not started to play Sections can be expanded or collapsed to reveal or hide the events that belong to the section Expanded sections are indicated by a symbol Countdown Timecode 00 00 03 72 Displays the time to the next event section or end of the list To select the countdown mode you want to monitor open the Options dialog box by selecting Options in the context menu M Series User Manua
26. NOTE You can paste events that you copied from a list running on the other play channel Viewing play event properties 1 Select the event in the List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following ER e Select the context menu button then choose the Properties e Select the Properties button Clip_1 Properties Clip_1 General J Location Yi fdetaultList_1 Section 1 Source VodNewsClips Clip_1 Start Time 01 00 00 00 Format NTSC Compression DY25 Event In 00 00 00 00 Event Out 00 00 16 268 Duration 00 00 16 268 Pause Ho Cancel Related topics e End properties page Pausing at the end of an event on page 208 210 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Renaming an event Renaming an event To rename an event perform one of the following e Select the event in List view then select the context menu button and choose Properties All the pages in the Event Properties dialog box allow renaming the event e Select the event in List view then switch to the Event View Select the Event name control Event Clip_1 and enter a new name Locating the source clip The locate menu item is used to locate and select the source clip in the Clips pane that is used to generate an event To locate the source clip e Select the event in List view then select the context menu button and choose Locate The source clip is selected in the Clips pane
27. Playback corresponds to the direction and rotational speed of the knob Shuttle Press SHTL then rotate the knob for 32x to 32x normal playback speed Variable Speed Play slo mo Press VAR Off speed play begins You can rotate the knob to set the play speed RANGE 1x normal playback speed otherwise speed remains at the preset play speed or the last variable play speed used Variable play speed is implemented using interpolated line and field smoothing Range of jog speeds can be set for 1x or 3x Range of shuttle speeds 16x or 32x Preset can be set to 25x 5x or 75x Initial play speed can be set to start at either the preset speed or the last play speed set by the Jog Shuttle knob Rotate the knob to scroll through lists that appear on the Knob Phone Jack amp VGA display Select items by pressing in on the knob Used to monitor the audio of the selected channel The Level Control a level control also adjusts the rear panel monitor level unless disabled in Configuration Manager burst audio at a fixed window size similar to audio CD behavior M Series User Manual Control of the rear panel audio monitor output can be disabled and the monitor level set to unity Scrub audio is provided at Shuttle Jog speeds between 3x to 3x Outside this range audio defaults to 20 April 2005 Tilting the front panel Tilting the front panel The following diagram illustrates how
28. Storage Altitude To 40 000 feet Non Operating Mechanical Shock Class 5 30G Thomson Grass Valley 001131500 Random Vibration Operational Class 6 Thomson Grass Valley 001131500 Non Operational Class 5 Thomson Grass Valley 001131500 Transportation Thomson Grass Valley 001131500 Equipment Type Information Technology Equipment Class Class 1 Installation Category Category II Local level mains appliances portable equipment etc Pollution Degree Level 2 operating environment indoor use only 300 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Mechanical specifications Mechanical specifications Dimension Measurement Height 7 in 177 mm Width 17 75 in 450 mm Depth 25 5 in 647 mm Rack mounting ears in forward position Weight 55 Ibs 25 kg a Adjustable rack mounting ears accommodate different rack depth limitations Electrical specifications The following sections describe the electrical specifications Serial Digital Video SDI Parameter Specification Video Standard 525 Line or 625 Line component Number of Inputs 1 per record channel Number of Outputs 2 per play channel Data format Conforms to SMPTE 259M Number of bits 10bits Embedded Audio Data format conforms to SMPTE 272M 1994 48 KHz locked to video and 16 bit pcm only User selectable audio group 1 4 User can disable embedded audio on SDI output
29. The appearance of the asset list and file open dialog boxes is determined by the Options setting See Modifying the asset list view on page 227 4 In the Source section browse to locate and select the source file or enter the path name using the File Name edit control About browsing in the Import dialog box The Look in label shows the current location The list under the Look in label displays the contents of the current location You can select items in the list such as a machine disk drive or folder to explore its contents Clicking the up arrow button moves up one directory level in the storage hierarchy The Look in drop down list allows you to choose from one of the most recent source locations visited history 5 In the Destination section Bin Name displays the name of the current bin which is where the imported file is placed 6 Specify a clip name if needed by selecting the Clip Name edit control The system suggests a clip name based on a seed name specified in the 1VDR Configuration Manager application for example Clipx_xxx You can select the Clip Name edit control to rename it as you like 7 Select Import to start the import NOTE Import is a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor See Guide to using the Transfer Monitor on page 267 to view the job Status 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 259 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Importing assets
30. choose Exit to Windows then select OK AppCenter shuts down and the Windows desktop appears CAUTION The M Series is not a general purpose Windows workstation A The Windows configuration on the iVDR has been specifically set for use as a real time device The M Series iVDR is configured for automatic logon allowing unattended booting To avoid partial or total system failure do not modify any operating system settings unless approved by Grass Valley including but not limited to the following Do not use the User Manager Do not use the Disk Administrator Do not load any third party software Do not install any Windows updates other than critical updates without contacting Grass Valley Product Support M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 100BaseT Configuration Data and streaming between iVDRs 3 In the Windows taskbar select Start Settings Network and Dial up Connections and continue with standard Windows procedures to configure the TCP IP protocol properties on each M Series 1VDR on the network You can setup the network using DHCP DNS WINS or other standard networking mechanisms NOTE Fora small network without a DHCP server or domain name server DNS you can set up a static IP address and create a Host file on each iVDR The Host file specifies a device name for each IP address used on the network Refer to the Windows documentation or your network administrator for more information 4 Sh
31. disk volume or a bin to explore its contents Clicking the up arrow button moves up one directory level in the storage hierarchy The Look in drop down list allows you to choose from one of the most recent source locations visited history 5 In the Destination section Bin Name displays the name of the current bin which is 260 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 Importing assets from another iVDR or Profile XP system where the imported file is placed 6 Specify a clip name if needed by selecting the Clip Name edit control The system suggests a clip name based on a seed name specified in the 1VDR Configuration Manager application for example Clipx_xxx You can select the Clip Name edit control to rename it as you like 7 Select Import to start the transfer NOTE Import is a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor See Guide to using the Transfer Monitor on page 267 to view the job Status M Series User Manual 261 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Sending media to a file or a device You can send iVDR media to another location in two ways Send to a File You can export 1VDR assets using standard media file formats Supported formats include SMPTE 360M gxf or AVI DV Type 2 avi Media files can be exported to a local iVDR disk drive fixed or removable media or a mapped networked drive Note that when sending lists or programs to a file
32. e Composite analog video input performance on page 307 Video codec description Model Compression Types Description M 122A DV25 SMPTE 314M 1999 M 222A DV25 SMPTE 314M 1999 MPEG2 I frame only 4 2 2 data rate up to 25Mbs Selectable encode range includes active picture or active picture plus VBI M 222D DV25 SMPTE 314M 1999 MPEG2 I frame only 4 2 2 data rate up to 25Mbs Selectable encode range includes active picture or active picture plus VBI M 322D DV25 SMPTE 314M 1999 DV50 SMPTE 314M 1999 MPEG2 I frame only 4 2 2 data rate up to 50Mbs Selectable encode range includes active picture or active picture plus VBI MPEG D10 Play only 4 2 2 30 40 50 Mb s Media is input via network stream or imported from file Vertical blanking interval compression DV25 compression mode on the iVDR supports EI A CEA 608 B Line 21 data services closed captioning This also includes the XDS portions of EIA 608 eXtended Data Services which is used for program ratings time of day etc In DV25 mode the M Series decodes and records all line 21 data from both video fields inserts it in the DV data stream and then on playout regenerates the signals on line 21 M Series MPEG I Frame Only compression has the same capabilities when you select the VBI plus picture option in the Configuration dialog box See Selecting video compression on page 105 When VBI plus picture is selected 32 additional lines of the verti
33. e Using the event length control on page 207 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 205 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Using the Event In Out buttons To move clip marks 1 Use the transport controls to locate the desired frame NOTE If the List view is playing a list you cannot monitor video and audio of an event when you switch to the Event view The channel resources video and audio outputs are being used by the List view application However you can still edit an event in Event view by using the event in out timecode controls to enter timecodes values 2 In Event view select Event In Event In to set mark in point or Event Out Event out to set mark out point 3 Do one of the following e For an existing event select Accept to propagate the change to the event in the list e For anew event select Insert to add the event to the list Using the timecode entry controls 1 In Event view select the Event In or Event Out timecode contro 90 01 11 09 to open the timecode entry dialog box Mark Out x Clear Back Cancel 2 Enter a timecode value using the onscreen keypad or an external keyboard then select OK or Enter Alternatively Use the current position scrub bar i iii dialog box to locate the desired frame then select OK in the timecode entry 206 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Clearing Event In Event out marks C Scrub Bar Click and drag while monitoring c
34. each cue point in the list Each cue point becomes a mark in point while the mark out point is the same as the source clip See Creating Subclips on page 179 Help opens the online help program E to E When E to E mode is enabled the channel output displays the corresponding record channel input when the play channel is stopped or the clip is ejected If E to E is disabled the output freezes on the last frame of video See Selecting E to E mode on page 182 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Loading a clip from the Clips pane Loading a clip from the Clips pane To load a clip from the Clips pane 20 April 2005 1 In the toolbar select the Split Screen button 2 Select a play channel using the front panel button P or the play channel tab in the Tools pane OPt Player 3 In the toolbar select Clips 4 To load a clip from the Clips pane Click or touch the clip and drag it to the Player pane Rotate the front panel Selection Knob to select a clip then push in on the knob to load the clip Select the clip then choose the Load button in the Clips pane Double click on an clip Select a clip then press Enter on an external keyboard NOTE When a bin contains a large number of clips it may be easier to display the Clips pane in full screen mode In full screen mode clips can still be loaded even though the active play channel is hidden M Series User Manual 165 Chapte
35. playout on page 295 and Jumping to a specific timecode on page 295 Load opens the Load Clip dialog which displays the contents of the current bin Select a clip then choose OK to load Properties Opens the Clip Properties dialog for the current or preview clip Options Opens the Options dialog box used to select control mode and control port See Selecting the control port and control mode on page 282 Goto Properties 290 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Guide to Protocol Player Local Protocol mode Control Description and User Operation Current Frame Timecode and Stop Mode 42 77 28 42 Fe Indicates the recorded timecode of the current frame being played The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed when there is no recorded timecode The text displayed to the right of clip timecode indicates the playback mode selection EE or PB When E to Eis selected the play channel output switches to the record channel input when playback is stopped When PB is selected play channel output freezes on the last video frame To select the playback mode refer Selecting E to E mode on page 182 Clip name amp Current Bin Clip Clip_2 Location vs fAdetault Displays the current or preview clip s name and location in the video storage file system You can toggle between current and preview clip name by clicking the thumbnail image To rename the clip touch or cl
36. selecting 102 T tab labels changing 132 thumbnail default 77 time cursor 190 time delay See continuous record time dome in Player 161 time of day source selecting 103 time of day timecode recording 151 timecode 20 April 2005 intermittent or missing 138 internal generator selecting 151 missing 177 recording time of day 151 replacing clip timecode 161 177 selecting list timecode 216 source selecting 138 151 striping 138 177 VITC reader setup 110 VITC generating 116 timing video output 118 touch screen calibrating 85 cleaning 85 Transfer Monitor 87 description 267 starting 267 transfer job properties viewing 270 transfer job aborting 271 transfer job removing 271 using 267 viewing transfer jobs 269 transferring assets to a file 262 to another device 262 265 transport controls displaying onscreen controls 78 front panel 84 record button sequence 127 trimming a clip 58 162 174 U unused media erasing 239 USB drives using 263 V V drive 222 VBI compression 106 306 VBI Line 21 data services 306 VDCP 278 279 ventilation 15 versions showing 90 vertical blanking interval compression 106 VGA monitor output enabling 86 VGA monitor connecting 26 video analog composite output adjusting 114 automatic gain control 109 20 April 2005 colorbar test signal 117 connections 22 24 output timing adjustment 118 reference connection 28 video compression 105 video data rate se
37. 12 GPI output signals through a rear panel connector for controlling external equipment You can configure events and sections in a playlist to trigger GPI outputs A GPI trigger does not disrupt playout of the play events GPI triggers can be set to occur at the beginning or end of an event or section or at these points with some offset e GPI input triggers You can assign the GPI inputs to control one or more play channels and the action you want the iVDR channel s to take play VAR play cue next event or cue next section etc See Configuring GPI inputs on page 121 184 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Before using Playlist Before using Playlist Read the following sections before using Playlist Terms used in Playlist The following terms are used in the Playlist application Term Definition List A list is a sequence of events Event Events are the components that make up a list Events are created by adding a clip or program to sections in a list Section All events in a list belong to a section A list has at least one section Sections have properties that include repeat and pause A list can have up to 100 sections Each section can have up to 1000 events Source Clip This is the clip inserted in a list to create a play event Program Playlists can be saved as a program Programs generated in Playlist include all the media and transitions in the playlist but nothing that breaks the
38. 16bit pcm 32 44 1 48KHz locked and unlocked Audio Outputs 4 channels per play channel two channels per BNC connector all audio outputs 16bit pcm 48KHz sampled locked to a common video output clock Input Impedance 75 ohms unbalanced Analog Audio Parameter Specification Audio Standard Balanced differential analog Audio Inputs 2 per record channel Female XLR Audio Outputs 2 per play channel Male XLR Impedance Input 15k ohms balanced Output 50 ohms per side balanced Sampling and encoding 48 KHz and 16 bit pcm 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 303 Appendix A Specifications Audio Monitor Parameter Specification Audio Standard Balanced differential analog Stereo pair on two Male XLRs Signal Source Switched to monitor the audio of the selected channel Output Impedance 50 ohms per side balanced Audio headphone output with Front Panel option Parameter Specification Audio Standard Single ended analog output with volume control Channels One stereo pair switched to monitor selected video channel Connector 1 4 inch Stereo Audio Jack LTC Input Output Parameter Specification Standard SMPTE 12M Longitudinal Time Code AC coupled differential input Number of Inputs 1 channel per record Female XLR Number of Outputs 1 channel per play Male XLR Input Impedance 1K ohm Output Impedan
39. 173 Locate Locates the currently loaded clip in the Clips pane See Hel a Locating a clip on page 156 Select Timecode Source Opens the Timecode Source Select dialog See Changing the timecode source on page 152 Help Opens online help Thumbnail Used to visually identify the clip By default the thumbnail is oe AT SARN generated using the 16th frame of video Z Time Dome This multi function indicator displays record progress and available storage By default the Time Dome indicates one revolution every 10 seconds or one revolution during a fixed length recording Select the Time Dome then choose Available Storage or Record Progress only See Displaying available storage space on page 156 Progress 9 Only gt Progress D and Available Storage 00 29 30 24 Length Ber Select the Length control to enter the clip length then choose record Recording continues until you choose stop or the specified length is reached Protocol Monitor Button t Appears when a channel is configured for remote control using a remote control protocol applications The button flashes when the application is successfully receiving serial control protocol commands Selecting the button opens the Protocol Monitor pane used to monitor command activity See Monitoring remote control communications on page 297 NOTE The Protocol Monitor dialog will not open until a controller
40. 29 00 00 14 09 Player Operate remotely using Applications G Preset Clip 5 E industry standard serial control including Player a ania protocols over RS 422 or and Recorders GS ne Out Length Ethernet Protocol specific 11 29 54 21 11 30 14 08 00 00 19 17 recorder and player applications aii eis wx i are provided for each supported protocols Playlist List View Player Create and play event playlists 00 00 51 05 00 00 13 714 section 1 A 2 01 00 00 00 00 00 16 28 Clip_1 C 01 00 16 28 00003114 Chip 2 v On O 6 0 Clipe Bien Event View 00 00 00 00 G005 0002 00205 00 02 v M az Lists include clips recorded in Recorder or imported using the Clips pane M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Tools included in AppCenter AppCenter includes the following tools for managing the 1VDR and its assets Tools included in AppCenter Tools User Interface Essentials Tasks Clips Pane O R1 Recenter P1 Mayer pe Sw Lookin Y default z Managing media stored in the media file system including view properties move copy delete transfer and import export Monitor Pane 14 30 05 25 14 19 37 230 14 30 05 265 1 20 56 27 Cip_t Clip_2 cip_5 Cip Recor des Player Recorder Player Monitoring channel input or output and selecting channel control applications Configuration Manager Configuration for iVDR 1 What is your system video standard NTS
41. 800x600 or larger you can reposition the AppCenter window as needed on the Windows desktop To reposition the AppCenter window click the StatusBar or an open space on the Toolbar and then drag the window to a new position Toolbar button descriptions 20 April 2005 Toolbar button Description Ben Opens a pop up menu containing items for managing the 1VDR configuration dialog shutdown dialog and to minimize AppCenter Opens a pop up menu containing the Transfer Monitor and Help menu selections Displays the monitor application in the Tools pane which allows you to monitor one channel of video input video on record channels or playback on play channels The rear panel audio monitor output and front panel headphone jack is automatically switched to follow the video channel monitored Displays the media management application in the Tools pane which allows you to manage media stored on the iV DR move delete copy import export Application View Buttons D View buttons appear in the AppCenter toolbar for channel applications that have more than one view The view buttons for Playlist are shown here Opens the edit pop up menu which includes Undo Redo Cut Paste Copy and Multiple item select An infinite level of undo is provided for Clip name mark in mark out length or cue points Unloading or loading clears the undo lists Cannot undo any operations after the clip is ejecte
42. A keyboard can be connected along with a mouse and VGA monitor to operate AppCenter and channel applications A keyboard can also be used with the front panel The following describes the keyboard shortcuts available for AppCenter Keyboard shortcuts are disabled when text entry dialog boxes are open F F2 IFs Vira FS lire leE Vice FO IIF IEn F2 sc Channel Select ee P1 Raq P2 HH oP ml _ BeA Channel select ee Select gt E Play Stop 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 79 Chapter 3 Product Description Off speed play controls For this action Press Play faster Shift L Repeat this key sequence to increment the play speed up to the maximum forward shuttle speed Play slower Shift J Repeat this key sequence to decrement the play speed up to the maximum reverse shuttle speed VAR speed increment period Press for VAR play mode then repeat to increment VAR speed VAR speed decrement comma Press for VAR play mode then repeat to decrement VAR speed Stop Mode transport controls For this action Press Cue to mark in A Shift I Cue to mark out S Shift O Next frame Arrow right Previous frame Arrow left Go forward 1 second Shift Arrow right Go back 1 second
43. AMP AMP is an extension of the Odetics protocol gt BVW Protocol supports standard set of commands used for VTR machine control BVW Insert Edit used by most edit control panels is not supported To enable remote control protocol support for the 1VDR you must start and configure a protocol application on one or more 1VDR s channels See Starting a remote control protocol application on page 281 About Local Remote mode You can configure the protocol applications for Protocol control only or Local and Protocol control When you start a protocol application you can configure the control mode as needed In Protocol control only mode you are able to monitor operations on the 1VDR but you cannot perform any control operations locally All control comes from the external device The buttons menu items and other interface controls are disabled From the local 1VDR you can see the control operations as they take place but you can t control channel resources using the user interface on the 1VDR In Local and Protocol control mode both local and remote control are allowed Control comes from the external device but at the same time all user interface controls are enabled See Selecting the control port and control mode on page 282 About AMP protocol support You can use Advanced Media Protocol AMP to control 1VDR record and play channels This protocol is an extension of the Odetics protocol an
44. COMMMUOUS record sssr a te chiens E 146 Using IEEE 1394 Record mode cccccssessesseeeeeeeeecesssseessseesseeeeeeecesseasseasseeeeenees 148 Changing video compression SEttiNGS cccccccccccececccceeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeseseeseseees 151 Selecting the audio monitor SOULCE ccccccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceueeeeeeeaeeeaaaaeaeeaaaaaaaaass 151 Changing the timecode SOUC seseina E a 152 Changing the current bin ssa 2 coer tenet spancasemeaseed een ceetatesecs eccd tse s dees ne sasatsatcgoinameneust does 154 Previewing SACI cS asana a a 154 Renaming a Cl eect eset tat on a a a a a 155 VIOWINg CID DropernIE Senra E A e a N E 155 LOCANA CD eeni a scern Serer ae err trn rere cee creer Seocren eer 156 Displaying available storage SPACE ccecccseccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeeeeneees 156 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Before usino Flayer acsecsacecsddsacenseette re xgs i aaa nE aa oia A EA canis 158 Working with clips that are still recording ccccseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeseeseeeesaseeess 158 Monitoring the play Channell cccccscecceceeeeeececeeeeeceseeeeeseeeeeeesaesueeeseseeeessneees 158 Playing a playlist saved AS A program cccccccccssseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasaeeeeeeeessaaeeseees 158 Dla MING Playe oana aa oeouasvestaumeadeed 159 Guide tousing Player Play VIW sii irssisen aa a a a eM aneren tes 160 Guide to using Player GUE ViOW c ccccsccceccceeceeeeeeseeseeece
45. Goto and choose Selection in the Goto pop up menu Then press Play Playlist keyboard shortcuts You can also control Playlist playout using an external keyboard Refer to Using Keyboard shortcuts on page 79 Playing a list using GPI input triggers You can control how a list plays using GPI input triggers assigned to the play channel Refer to Configuring GPI inputs on page 121 for information on configuring GPI inputs 202 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Viewing list properties Viewing list properties To open the list properties dialog box doing one of the following select the context tg MOMEN Da aai menu button 1a then choose the List Properties creel List_1 Properties General Data Tracks Format Timecode Compression Length End sections Events Created Modified w Locked Mame List_1 Type List Location 4 default video 1 Audio 2 TC 2 NTSC DropFrame DYZ 00 01 04 221 1 S 08 14 2003 09 32 AM 08 14 2003 09 33 AM Cancel Refer to the following for more information on these properties pages e Data Page Adding and modifying asset metadata on page 253 e Timecode Page Selecting the playlist timecode on page 216 e End Locking a list on page 204 Creating a looping list You can loop on a list until you intervene 20 April 2005 1 Open the list properties dialog box doing one of the following
46. JO OOOO OOOO OOS SDI R1 amp P1 Composite R2 amp P A MON O Ok T S T Co 1 f N SS SS Ss SS SS SS eGo SRS AS H o aE R1 CH1 on ola R2 LTC Q CH1 OA CH2 Analog audio Channel 1 L Channel 2 R Recorder 2 Inputs R2 Video SDI E Composite R1 i Composite R2 amp P py pay 1 OUT Rt IN R our Pi OUT r2 Gu O BS npon HSS SSS SO P ST eS oars Z J e eY 2 T l T OUT ZNI Saunan Timecode E HO ad 3 Analog audio SY Channel 1 L J gt frees Channel 2 R 22 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 M 122A M 222A Player output connections M 122A M 222A Player output connections Player 1 Outputs P1 Video Composite Timecode Analog audio Channel 1 L Channel 2 R Player 2 Outputs P2 Video Composite Timecode Analog audio Channel 1 L Channel 2 R 20 April 2005 Composite R1 amp P SDI R1 amp P z IN P1OUT P1 OUT SOOO 556566 56656 Composite R2 amp P Cmpst ee LAINN HENNI WTS J INS lt L L O Co O eS O ey O 1 O G eS OUT Co O ey 1 G S gt SS gt SS R1 AS z g O O A Ae
47. Manager open to configure other 1VDR settings Also refer to these related topics 20 April 2005 GPI I O specifications on page 305 GPI I O connector pinouts on page 316 Connecting GPT on page 54 Using GPI output triggers in playlists on page 200 M Series User Manual 123 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Configuring the Monitor pane display You can configure the way the Monitor pane displays information for record and play channels as follows 1 Select System Configuration then Channel 2 Select a channel tab R1 P1 R2 or P2 then open the Monitor link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link Configuration for iVDR 1 J R1 kE A gt Audio Input Trim Zo Monitor What should be displayed in the monitor Audio meters Channel Information Cancel Select the channel tab label Application name default Asset name Timecode Countdown Cancel 3 You can modify the way information is displayed for the currently selected channel 124 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Configuring the Monitor pane display as follows e Show Hide audio meters e Show Hide channel information e Change the information displayed on the channel tab label you can display application name asset name timecode or countdown 4 Repeat the previous steps for the other channels 5 Change other settings as necessary in the Confi
48. Opens the Rename dialog box for the selected asset Use the onscreen keyboard or an external keyboard to enter the new asset name See Renaming a bin on page 233 or See Renaming an asset on page 234 Delete Deletes the selected asset See Deleting a bin on page 232 or Deleting an asset on page 239 Links Opens the Links dialog box allowing you to locate other assets that are linked to the selected asset See Finding linked assets on page 250 Properties Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected asset See Viewing clip properties on page 272 Help Opens online help for the Clips pane 226 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Modifying the asset list view Modifying the asset list view 20 April 2005 The asset list in the Clips pane displays the contents of the current bin and the results from searches or from requests for linked assets You can choose one of three views to best suit your workflow 1 Select the Clips pane context menu button Cw then choose Options Views Text Show Modified Date Image Create Date Details Modified Date an Cancel Type Location 2 In the view options dialog box select one of the following view options Image view R1 Recorder P1 Player R2 Recorder P2 Player System Look in Tools fag Properti Z 4 ae E Search a len a rem
49. Pausing at the end of an event on page 208 e Changing the event thumbnail image on page 209 e Adjusting the event audio level on page 209 e Moving events in the list on page 210 e Renaming an event on page 211 e Viewing play event properties on page 210 About editing events while playing a list You cannot use the Event view while playlist is playing You must stop play back then open Event view to edit an event Moving Event In and Event out marks Every event has a event in point and an event out point which refer to the first and last frames displayed when the event plays When first created event marks are set to the mark in and mark out of the source clip You can edit the event marks in order to reference only the desired media Event marks can be cleared to reset them to the marks specified in the source clip See Clearing Event In Event out marks on page 207 The following restrictions apply when editing event marks e Event in must precede the Event out e Event marks cannot be set outside the recorded media of the source clip NOTE If more media exists outside the current mark a lt lt lt or gt gt gt symbol are displayed beneath the current event mark timecode To move event marks view the event in Event view then use one of the following methods to move clip marks e Using the Event In Out buttons on page 206 e Using the timecode entry controls on page 206
50. Recorder P2 Playe 7 Lookin default J Organize Bins Load default Properti mybin Search Recycle Bin Related topics e Creating a new bin on page 231 Previewing a clip You can preview a clip while it is still being recorded Preview loads the currently recording clip into a play channel The play channel becomes the active channel and the clip is cued and ready for play NOTE If the corresponding play channel is not available i e the play channel is already playing a clip a warning message is displayed in the Statusbar 1 Start the record process 2 Preview the clip using one of the following methods e In the Recorder pane select the Preview button OF e Inthe Monitor pane select the record channel tab then drag and drop it in a play channel monitor The play channel becomes the active channel and the clip is cued and ready for play 3 To play the clip select the front panel play button i or use the onscreen transport controls gt 154 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Renaming a clip Renaming a clip You can rename a clip during or after recording To rename a clip 1 Select the clip name in the Recorder pane 2 Enter the new clip name using the onscreen or external keyboard 3 Select OK or Enter on the external keyboard If a clip with the new name already exists in the current bin an error message is displayed Viewing clip properties
51. Select Properties in the asset context menu or e Select the Properties button in the Clips pane If the Properties button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 The properties dialog box appears Clip_ 1 Properties x j Mame Clip_1 Add Data cep um Type Clip General H Location Vi fdefault Clear Media Modify Cancel 3 Select Data then Add Data or Modify on the data page M Series User Manual 253 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane 254 Create anew meta data tag with the following attributes Name Creator Type String String Integer Cancel Float Date Boolean 4 Define or modify metadata using the following steps a M Series User Manual Select Name then use the onscreen or external keyboard to enter the metadata name in the Name dialog box Names are not case sensitive Episode and episode are treated the same You cannot modify names of existing metadata See also Deleting asset metadata on page 257 Select Type then choose a data type from the drop down list Metadata types include String Integer Float Date and Boolean Refer to Working with asset metadata on page 252 Select Value then enter a metadata value in the Value dialog box Click OK to close the Add or Modify dialog box and save changes Your changes appear in the Properties
52. The assignable button allows you to modify the button assignment to j best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one eo second opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative Options button choices Button choices include Options or Properties The Gons buttons function the same as the context menu items See Protocol control only Context Menu later in this table Current Timecode Indicates the current timecode of the timecode source for recording 4 6 z a7 4 3 J 9 The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed if there is no input timecode Timecode Source The text displayed to the right of current timecode indicates the vite timecode source VITC LTC or INT internal generator You must temporarily switch to Local and Protocol control mode to change the record channel timecode source See Changing the timecode source on page 152 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 283 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols 284 Control Description and User Operation Clip Name and location Clip Location Yo newsclips Displays the current clip s name and location in the media storage system Protocol control only Context Menu Options Help Options Opens the Options dialog box Help Opens online help QO Thumb nail Used to visually identify the clip By default the thumbnail is genera
53. Toggling between multiple and single Channel VICWS 0 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 135 Displaying channel information in full screen mode eee eeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 135 Selecting the channel Control application c eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 136 Selecting the active Channel ccccccccsecccceccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeesseeeseeeecoassseececeeees 136 Chapter 6 Recording Clips Before using Recorder siveccniss conscuisciuwansncendaiee sabe yessunnaiededeavoaewsiaasuceanneneduinualiedatadennts 138 olain Recorde areca sock acces E E E EO 139 Guide to using Recorder ssscccccsssssseesssesseseeseseseeeecessseeeeeseeeeeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteess 140 FIECOIGING CPS ieena T E tae ear uk ie ek dled ole 142 TOrecord acip usino NeW CIID fess ceuces fester teick o a A Ei 142 To record a clip using crash record c cseessceeeeecccececeaeesseseeeeeeeeeeeesansaaseeessees 143 To record a clip using fixed IENGHN ccccccseseseeeeccaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeesseeeesenenas 143 To specify clip length after recording has DEQUN ccceceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 144 Using Continuous Record mode cis casas oes shoes erence see ewe hate die eed 145 About Continuous Record mode ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessesseseeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeees 145 Operational considerations cccccccccccceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeeesaeeseeeeeeeeessaesssaaeeseess 145 TO Stal
54. User Manual To start continuous record 3 To change continuous record length select Length in the Recorder pane The Length dialog box appears Length x 4 Using the onscreen keypad or external keyboard enter the clip length by typing only numbers colons are added automatically 5 Choose Ok in the dialog box or Enter on the external keyboard 6 Select the record button on the front panel or use the onscreen transport controls B Recording continues until Stop is selected While recording the mark in and mark out update with the current status of the clip The Time Dome gives a visual indication record progress 7 Load and play the clip in Player using one of the following steps e In the Recorder pane select the Preview button or e Inthe Monitor pane select the Record Channel tab then drag and drop from the Record Channel monitor to the Play Channel monitor The play channel becomes the active channel and the clip is cued and ready for play 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 147 Chapter 6 Recording Clips Using IEEE 1394 Record mode IEEE 1394 record mode is available in 1VDRs equipped with the optional IEEE 1394 interface board This optional board is used to provide one 1394A input for importing and recording media from a digital recording device that uses DV format After selecting the IEEE 1394 input for one of the Record channels you can use the iVDR transport controls to control the DV
55. a disk volume then select New Bin 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 231 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Organize Bins F defaut New Bin Type Bin Items 12 i Explore Created 03 18 03 11 22 4M 3 Enter the new bin name using the onscreen or external keyboard then press OK 4 Close the Organize Bins dialog box Deleting a bin 1 In the Clips pane select the Current Bin label then select the Organize Bins 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box choose the bin you want to delete 3 Select the Delete button or press the DELETE or BACKSPACE key on an external keyboard Deleted bins and assets are moved to the Recycle Bin unless the Remove items immediately when deleted option is set for the Recycle Bin see Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 242 Holding down the SHIFT key on an external keyboard during delete also bypasses the Recycle Bin NOTE You cannot delete a bin containing assets that are locked or in use However the unlocked assets in the bin will be deleted 4 Select Yes in the Confirm Delete dialog box 5 Close the Organize Bins dialog box 232 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Renaming a bin Renaming a bin 1 In the Clips pane select the Current Bin label MAPPA PREE then select the Organize Bins 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box choose the bin you want to rename then select Rename 3 Edit the bin name using the onscreen or external
56. aees 34 Select the audio input digital models only cccceeeeeecceeeeeeeseeceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeas 35 Select tiMECOAES SOUICE miraa gai re e 36 Verifying basic OPCl allo Msctico cette ire cee aceite hee erase et wet ate at 36 Setting up the Ethernet network cccccceesecsseeececeeeeeceaesaeeeesceeeeeeeeesseaeesseeeeeeeeeess 37 Connecting the Ethernet network Cabling ccccccccccecsessseeseeceeeeeeesaeeeeaeeeeees 37 100BaseT Configuration Data and streaming between IVDRS cccceeee 38 1GBaseT Configuration Data and streaming between iVDRS cccceee 42 Operating with both 100BT and 1GBT network connections ccccceeceeeees 46 100BaseT Configuration iVDR and Profile XP streaming cssessseeeeeeeeeees 47 Connecting IEEE 13944 icc i26 onc renane anake eae an esaea eead aa E aTe de daearen 53 Connecting Ro422 raaraa E a Ns fecal oh eS ates ach ae 53 Connecting GP ict sects ab areca secs AA E adeeaeaweaaars nice EO 54 Chapter 2 Quick Start Procedures TO TOCONG 2 CHO i taccd2e 0cectencusres ode ddhensG sansa a E en 56 TODAY Cle a a a S a e 57 Ro gi sakes ee Danne a a rene eer eera ee ore 58 LO Cleale a playlis Eserita a r a coe a eee des 59 Chapter 3 Product Description Product OVENVIEW 2 a naccasachast e a ta taausiceadteatedndesdecdace a 62 Key TCAUUNCS nerpie issu sitio d dine Revealer Saeed a E aeubenstsaeeetees 62 Functional COSCO OM y eeecl eect a
57. asset Deleting an asset You can delete assets to free storage space You can safely delete a clip without harming the subclips playlists and programs created from it The media referenced by subclips playlists and programs is preserved when the clip is deleted Once the source clip is deleted subclips and playlist events retain an extra 1 second of media before and after their mark points to allow some trimming Deleted assets are moved to the Recycle Bin unless the bypass Recycle Bin option is used See Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 242 You must empty the Recycle Bin to free storage space 1 Select the asset in the Asset List using the front panel touch screen the front panel selection knob or a mouse The multi select feature in the Edit menu enables multiple selections 2 Select Delete using one of the following e Select the Clips pane context menu button then choose Delete or e Select Delete in the asset context menu or e Select the Delete button in the Clips pane If the Delete button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 A progress dialog appears when deleting multiple assets If the selected asset is contained in the Recycle Bin it is permanently removed otherwise it is moved from its original bin into the Recycle Bin If an item of the same name is already in the Recycle Bin the new item is automatical
58. buttons Some buttons are assignable meaning you can change the order that buttons appear in some button groups to better suit your workflow Selecting a button for longer than approximately one second causes a pop menu to appear which lists the alternative button choices for that button Clip Thumbnail Used for visual identification of a clip in channel applications and Clips pane By default the thumbnail is generated from the 16th frame of video You can select a new thumbnail using Player see Changing the clip thumbnail image on page 176 If no thumbnail is available an icon is displayed showing there is no thumbnail Volume The set of media drives that functions as a single physical disk in the iVDR The volume name used in the iVDR is V for the internal drives Bin A bin is a container used to organize assets like clips and lists in the same way as directories or folders are used on a typical computer system A bin is associated with a single disk volume Current Bin The current bin functions as the target bin when recording clips or creating playlists It is also the source bin used to load clips and lists M Series User Manual Chapter 3 Product Description Selecting the channel application When the M Series 1VDR is started an application is launched for each channel From the factory Recorder starts on both record channels and Player starts on both play channels Use the following steps to
59. can specify the metadata name data type and value The metadata you add for one asset automatically appears on properties pages for all existing and future assets except with no value entered The values you specify for an asset are retained with the asset for the following operations copy move and send to The metadata you define for an asset can be used as search criteria in advanced search Metadata types and their possible values are described in the following table Data Type Value Example Name Value String User defined string Producer John Doe Integer An integer value Episode 4 Float A number expressed in Version 1 2 floating point Date Date Air Date 10 31 03 Boolean True or False QA False Topics in this section include e Adding and modifying asset metadata on page 253 e Clearing metadata on page 255 e Deleting asset metadata on page 257 252 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Adding and modifying asset metadata Adding and modifying asset metadata 20 April 2005 Use the following steps to add or modify metadata in the properties dialog box The metadata names you add will appear in the properties dialog box for all assets See also Deleting asset metadata on page 257 1 Select an asset in the Clips pane asset list 2 Open the Properties dialog box using one of the following e Select the Clips pane context menu button Cw then choose Properties or e
60. change the application running on a channel 1 In the AppCenter toolbar select Split Screen and then Monitor 74 13 99 75 2 ay as te a i oe N i aise S eo Control Application 14 19 37 10 14 20 56 27 1 26 j Clip_2 Clip_5 Clip_11 no we Drop down List Recorder Recorder Player Playlist L Remote AMP v aAi A2 4u ee D Player 2 No clip loaded 2 In the Monitor pane select the control application drop down list Player for the channel then choose an application The current applications closes and the selected application opens and appears in the Applications pane which becomes the active pane Displaying on screen transport controls On screen transport controls are provided for all AppCenter applications when the optional Front Panel is not installed Fast Rewind Stop Forward Play Record lt lt o gt D ed gt Cue to mark in Cue to mark out Field Reverse Field Advance Single click to Single click to reverse one field advance one field Transport controls are displayed depending on the VGA display setting of the iVDR when AppCenter starts e If the display setting is 640x480 when AppCenter starts the onscreen transport controls are not displayed e Ifthe display setting is greater than 640x480 when AppCenter starts the onscreen transport controls are displayed 78 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Using Keyboard shortcuts Using Keyboard shortcuts
61. communications on page 297 NOTE The Protocol Monitor dialog will not open until a controller is connected and at least one command set is sent 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 289 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols Guide to Protocol Player Local Protocol mode The Local and Protocol control mode allows you to control a play channel locally as well as remotely to play clips You can select this control mode by choosing Local and Protocol control in the Options dialog box See Selecting the control port and control mode on page 282 The following describes the controls and indicators displayed in the Local and Protocol control mode Assignable Clip Preview ClipName amp Countdown Context Buttons Timecode Current Bin Timecode Menu Default buttons Button are shown Options AMP Player 2 Clin lt l UE Thumbnail Time Dome Mark in amp Protocol O Meter Bar Click to toggle Mark Out Monitor Button between current Button amp preview clip Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignments to best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one second opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative Load button choices Goto Used to jump to a specific timecode in the current clip or skip to the preview clip See Skipping to the preview clip during Options
62. creates a new seed name For example if you rename Clip_1 to Promo subsequent clips will be named Promo 1 Promo 2 and so on If aclip is already loaded selecting New Clip ejects the current clip and creates a new one See To record a clip using New Clip on page 142 Preview Used to load the current clip in a play channel for playback while the clip is still recording After record is started select Preview to load the clip into the next available play channel then select Play See Previewing a clip on page 154 Locate Locates the currently loaded clip in the Clips pane See Locating a clip on page 156 Select Timecode Source Opens the Timecode Source Select dialog See Changing the timecode source on page 152 Help Opens online help QO Time Dome Progress Q Only Available 2 Storage 00 29 30 24 gt Available p Storage and Continuous mee Record Mode This multi function indicator displays either record progress only or available storage and record progress The Time Dome also indicates when the record channel is in Continuous Record mode Available storage is estimated using the amount of free disk space and the video compression settings for the channel The record progress indicator makes one revolution every 10 seconds in normal record or one revolution during a fixed length recording To change the Time Dome function select and hold the Time Dome
63. cue point becomes the mark in point while the mark out point is the same as the source clip If more than one cue point is selected a subclip is created using the first and last cue points The Create All feature creates a subclip for every cue in the list Each subclip duration is from each cue point to the source clip mark out point See Creating subclips in Cue view on page 181 Working with cue points 170 M Series User Manual Cue points are retained when a clip is copied or transferred Cue points are stored with the clip All the cue points of the original clip are retained when the clip is copied or transferred to another 1VDR Cue points and trimming After you trim a clip by moving the mark in or mark out points the cue points outside the new mark in and mark out points are cleared and must be reinserted Cue points and subclips Subclips created from a clip with cue points retain all cue points that fall between the marks of the new subclip The subclip has its own mark in and mark out points See Creating subclips in Cue view on page 181 Cue points and programs Cue points cannot be added to a program 20 April 2005 Viewing the cue list Viewing the cue list 1 Select a play channel using the front panel button f or the play channel tab in the Tools pane P t Piayer 2 In the toolbar select Cue The Cue view appears showing the cue list for the clip loaded in Player Initially
64. desktop e To minimize AppCenter select System in the AppCenter toolbar then choose Minimize e To maximize AppCenter select the Maximize button in the AppCenter title bar Windows Taskbar default settings To ensure that AppCenter displays properly when using the optional Front Panel do not modify the factory default Windows Taskbar settings both Autohide and Always on top should be disabled Otherwise the Taskbar will hide a portion of the AppCenter interface 82 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Guide to using the Front Panel Guide to using the Front Panel The Front Panel consists of three main components the VGA display and touch screen the channel select buttons and transport controls including the Jog Shuttle knob This section includes the following topics e Using Front Panel controls e Tilting the front panel e Cleaning the touch screen e Calibrating the front panel touch screen e Adjusting front panel display brightness VGA Display amp Touch Screen Ov grass valley Selection Knob oe et Channel R2 P2 0 Select Buttons Remote Indicator i SHTL soa Jog Shutile 14 00 00 0 i Controls 4 Bv Bai Bar Jog Shuttle Knob VAR Variable Speed Play Control Phone Jack amp Transport Control USB Connectors Level Control Buttons bottom edge
65. device remotely through the 1394 connection To use IEEE 1394 Record mode 1 Connect and power on the IEEE 1394 device Refer to Connecting IEEE 1394A on page 53 2 In Recorder select the menu button i it The options dialog box opens Select a video source for recording and display SDI Component IEEE 1394 Cancel 3 Select Video and choose IEEE 1394 then select OK IEEE 1394 view is displayed and the record channel input switches to the 1394 input Rf Clip lt no clip loaded gt Location local default IEFEE1 394 New Clip fe Preview In Out Length Goto 08 18 34 25 IEEE 1394 device gt ED Recorder 1 Device stopped 4 In the AppCenter toolbar select the Monitor pane then the Record channel tab 148 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 Using IEEE 1394 Record mode Initially the monitor pane displays black Use the following step to cue the IEEE 1394 device 5 While monitoring video and timecode in the monitor pane you can control the DV device remotely play rewind fast forward and stop in one of the following ways Use the 1VDR front panel controls transport control buttons Shuttle Jog Knob Use the record channel on screen transport controls in AppCenter VGA mode Use AppCenter keyboard shortcuts see Using Keyboard shortcuts on page 79 Select Goto in the Recorder pane then use the Goto Timecode
66. e Insure adequate air flow around the chassis to provide sufficient cooling Operating ambient temperature will affect the amount of air circulation required to keep the i1VDR within its temperature limitations See Environmental specifications on page 300 for details e If the system is installed with its ventilation intakes near another system s exhaust or in a closed or multi unit rack assembly the operating ambient temperature inside the chassis may be greater than the room s ambient temperature Install the system in an environment compatible with this recommended maximum ambient temperature e Ensure the rack is anchored to the floor so that it cannot tip over when the 1VDR is extended out of the rack e Be sure to mount the 1VDR in a way that ensures even weight distribution in the rack Uneven mechanical loading can result in a hazardous condition Secure all mounting bolts when installing the chassis to the rack The following sections describe installing the M Series iVDR step by step 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 309 Appendix B Rack mounting and Connector Pin outs Rack mount hardware shipped with the i1VDR Your 1iVDR comes with rack mounting hardware as shown The 1VDR are shipped with the chassis sections already attached 10 32 PHS Automatic Chassis section is pre installed on the iVDR chassis Stationary Rack Section Flat Nut Bar 10 32 PHS Stop Latch NOTE Right hand and left hand st
67. end of an event For more information on creating programs in Playlist refer to the Saving a list as a program on page 218 222 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 About the Current Bin drop down list About the Current Bin drop down list e To access the Current Bin drop down list touch or click the Current Bin label Current bin menu items 20 April 2005 System Tools Monitor Lookin Y default_ amp gt R2 Recorder P2 Playe Look in default J Organize Bins default Properti Recycle Bin Search Search 05 01 03 05 28 03 Search 05 26 03 05 28 03 Search Modified Last 5 Days Menu Item Description and User Operation Organize Bins Opens the Organize Bins dialog box used to manage bins create delete rename change current bin See Working with bins on page 230 Bin List List of all the bins in the current disk volume A volume must always have at least one bin The default bin is created automatically Recycle Bin Displays the contents of the Recycle Bin All assets deleted from the asset list are stored in the Recycle Bin until it is emptied See Working with the Recycle Bin on page 242 Cached Search The last four search results are cached You can view the most recent search results Results using the Current Bin drop down list See Locating assets on page 243 M Series Us
68. flow of playout such as a pause at the end of an event Programs are also created from the continuous record mode Working with clips currently being recorded Clips that are currently recording behave as other clips do in a list except for the following restriction e The event out timecode is set to the last recorded frame at the time the clip is inserted in List view or created in Event view You can move the event out timecode as needed while the clip is still recording or after record is stopped Working with programs A program is aclip generated from a playlist using the Save As Program feature in the Playlist application A program includes all the media in the playlist but does not include any event that breaks the flow of playout such as a pauses between events You can insert programs into other playlists as an event or load and play them using the standard Player application You can also send a program to a GXF file or a video network stream Monitoring the play channel When the Playlist channel is active the channel monitor in the Monitor pane shows the video output of the current list When another channel is active the Playlist s channel monitor shows the thumbnail from the current play event Each time a new event is played a new thumbnail is displayed The Monitor pane also displays status information for the current list showing name and countdown timecode of the event section or list When the Monitor pane
69. following describes the basic controls in the Recorder user interface Assignable Current Timecode Clip Name amp O Context Buttons Timecode Source Current Bin Menu Default buttons Click clip name are shown to rename clip R1 New Clip Preview Properties Time Dome WIRE Clip Clip_i Location local default In Out 00 00 00 00 16 27 14 01 0 00 12 18 A0 29 30 24 A v Al A2 Recorder 1 clip_i recording ee a Signal Status Length Meter Bar Indicators Click to enter Button fixed length Click to adjust audio Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons New Clip Preview Locate Properties ronis Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignments to best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one second opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Properties Same as selecting the Properties menu item New Clip Same as selecting the New Clip menu item Preview Same as selecting the Preview menu item Locate Same as selecting the Locate menu item Current Timecode 46 27 73 29 vitc Indicates the current timecode of the timecode source selected for the channel Text color is white during record and dimmed at other times The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed when the timecode source is not present or is invalid See Cha
70. freeze on last frame of video in stop mode You can select line interpolated or interlaced Note that in normal play mode the play channel can be setup for E to E mode instead of displaying freeze frame in stop mode E to E mode is enabled disabled in the application running on the channel Refer to the Guide to using Player Play View on page 160 or Guide to using Playlist List View on page 188 1 Select System and choose Configuration then select the Channel button select the P1 or P2 tab and open the Video Output link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link 2 Locate the still play mode settings 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 115 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Configuration for iVDR 1 Black Level imin default Sharpness imin default Default dog Still Play Mode Field Line interpolated Frame Interlaced Use the scroll button if necessary to locate the settings 3 Set the still play mode as follows e Field This is the default setting and uses the content of one field for both fields during still play for a one field freeze This mode eliminates the motion jitter that can be present in Interlaced mode e Frame This mode displays two fields in still play mode for a two field freeze With this mode you might see some motion jitter in still play 4 Change other settings as necessary in the Configuration dialog box then select OK to s
71. if required 4 Select the Program Name text entry control to enter the program name using the onscreen or external keyboard then click Save 5 The list is saved as a program in the current bin 218 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Chapter g Managing Media Using Clips Pane 20 April 2005 Information in this chapter includes Guide to using the Clips pane Modifying the asset list view Selecting Split or Full screen mode Working with bins Working with assets Working with the Recycle Bin Locating assets Working with asset metadata Importing media from a file or a device Sending media to a file or a device Guide to using the Transfer Monitor Viewing clip properties M Series User Manual 219 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Guide to using the Clips pane The Clips pane in the iVDR user interface provides tools for managing assets stored on the media drives Assets include clips and playlists and programs In addition to the typical file management tasks such as browse copy move delete and managing the directory structure you ll also use the Clips pane to transfer files to other devices and to import or export assets using standard file formats Viewing the Clips pane To view the Clips pane select Clips in the AppCenter tool bar Current Bin Context Label Menu Click to change the current bin ORL Recor
72. in subclip mode now represent the attributes of the subclip rather than the original clip To rename the subclip select the subclip name control and enter the new name in the Clip Name dialog using the onscreen or external keyboard then select OK or Enter Enter the subclip marks as follows a Using the transport controls position the clip to the desired frame for mark in then select the In button b Using the transport controls position the clip to the desired frame for mark out then select the Out button Alternatively Select the mark in or mark out timecode entry controls and enter a specific timecode value Alternatively Select the Length timecode entry control and enter a clip length then create either a mark in or a mark out point In Subclip mode select Accept Input The new clip is created and Player returns to Subclip mode with a new subclip name loaded NOTE Selecting the Source Clip button or the Eject button prior to pressing the Accept button closes Subclip mode without creating a new clip Both of these buttons are used to return to the Play view Subclip MyClip 1 Source INT Avs detault MyClip ns Out Length 09 20 32 06 09 20 33 22 00 00 01 15 00 00 00 15 j v ai Gaz 4 gt Source Clip Player 1 MyClip stopped 20 April 2005 About Auto Subclip mode About Auto Subclip mode The Auto Subclip feature changes the way that the subclip mode beha
73. keyboard the select OK Asset names can contain up to 32 characters including spaces Spaces count as two characters and the following characters are not allowed lt gt single quote double quote and at the beginning of the name NOTE If the renamed bin contains assets that are locked or in use two bins will appear after renaming one with the new name and one with the old name containing the problem asset 4 Close the Organize Bins dialog box 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 233 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Working with assets Assets displayed in the Asset List include clips subclips playlists and programs Refer to the following procedures to work with assets Renaming an asset on page 234 Selecting multiple assets on page 234 Moving an asset to another bin on page 235 Copying an asset on page 236 Deleting an asset on page 239 Erasing a clip s unused media on page 239 Locking an asset on page 241 Renaming an asset 1 Select the asset in the Asset List using the front panel touch screen the front panel selection knob or a mouse Select Rename using one of the following e Select the Clips pane context menu button Cw then Rename or e Select Rename in the asset context menu or e Select the Rename button in the Clips pane If the Rename button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable button
74. monitor output 27 source selecting 151 177 digital audio specification 303 embedded audio group SDI input 111 SDI output 120 meters disabling enabling 124 133 rear panel connectors 22 24 scrub audio during off speed play 84 audio level adjusting clip play level 162 176 adjusting clip record level 141 audio input trim 112 audio reference level 102 20 April 2005 auto logon accounts 70 auto subclip mode 161 181 automatic gain control 109 available storage 141 156 AVI encode requirements for importing 258 307 export to file using 262 handling media with 4 channel audio 262 B battery replacement 16 bin creating a new bin 231 current bin 77 current bin changing 154 deleting 232 description 77 naming illegal characters 233 properties viewing 274 renaming 233 BVW 278 279 C CD RW drive formatting the disk 93 reading the disk in other computers 95 sending files to 262 certifications and compliances 17 channel application 77 channel application selecting 78 channel information displaying 124 channel monitor full screen mode 128 channel tab label selecting 124 132 clearing clip marks 175 clip audio level adjusting in Player 162 176 cue points adding 170 editing In Out points 162 174 erasing unused media 239 locating 167 locking 241 metadata 251 naming illegal characters 234 playing quick start 57 previewing 141 154 M Series User Manual 317 Index recording quick start 56 renam
75. only the GXF format is available Send to a Stream The iVDR supports streaming media transfers over the standard Ethernet port or optional network adapters Streaming transfers allow playout while the asset is still transferring Destination devices for streaming include the Grass Valley Profile XP Media Platform other M Series 1VDRs or any device that supports GXF SMPTE 360M streaming transfers You must configure the 1VDR network adapter prior to using the Send to stream feature See Setting up the Ethernet network on page 37 A transfer job is created for each send to operation Once created transfer jobs are added to the transfer job queue where they are dispatched in a first in first out basis Up to four transfer jobs can execute simultaneously Any additional jobs wait in the queue You can use the Transfer Monitor to check the status of your transfers Guide to using the Transfer Monitor on page 267 Topics in this section e Sending media to a file on page 262 e Sending assets to another machine on page 265 Sending media to a file Sending media to a file allows you to export 1VDR clips using either GXF or AVI DV Type 2 media file format The target location can be a local disk removable media drive or a shared network drive When exporting playlists or programs only the GXF format is available Ini VDRs that handle four channel audio only the first two tracks of audio are exported when
76. pane select the Record Channel tab then drag and drop from the Record Channel monitor to the Play Channel monitor The play channel becomes the active channel and the clip is cued and ready for play 8 Record continues until Stop is selected Related information e TEEE 1394A interface specification on page 305 e Connecting IEEE 1394A on page 53 150 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Changing video compression settings Changing video compression settings You can configure the compressions settings for each record channel When selecting compression settings there is always a trade off between image quality and storage capacity since higher video quality produces larger files You also must consider whether you plan to export or transfer media to external devices Larger files take longer to transfer over the network or export to a file To modify record channel compression settings refer to Selecting video compression on page 105 Selecting the audio monitor source M Series 1VDR models equipped with digital audio provide four audio channels per video channel You can select which stereo pair is routed to the rear panel monitor outputs and the front panel headphone jack To select the audio monitor source 1 In Play view select the menu button Ge then choose Options The options dialog box opens Options Monitor audio channels Timecode e lad 2 Select the Audio button 3 Select the
77. restart the iVDR Restarting is required for the video compression changes to take effect NOTE DV50 is available in model M 322D only 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 33 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR e MPEG I frame When you make this selection additional settings are available Proceed to step 7 to complete the MPEG I Frame settings NOTE MPEG I frame compression is not available in model M 122A 7 Make sure MPEG I frame is selected as instructed previously and then scroll down to display the additional MPEG settings Configuration for iVDR 1 system MPEG settings What is the chroma setting Channel 4 23 23 GPI What is the data rate 16 25 30 40 50 RN i 50 Mb s More Space Better Quality Record the following range Active picture only Active picture plus VBI Cancel 8 Select Data Rate SOMb s is available only in the M Series model M 322D 9 Select VBI settings Select the Active picture plus VBI option if you need to record signals or data inserted in the vertical blanking interval VBI Otherwise you should select Active picture only option The VBI information is compressed along with the picture content You may need to increase the data rate if you have trouble with the integrity of the VBI signals during playback 10 Select OK to save all changes at once 11 When prompted restart the 1VDR The restart is required to put the video compression or video standard cha
78. routing an asynchronous signal through the 1VDR However this is not required for recording the 1VDR can record asynchronous signals To enable disable E to E mode e In Play view select the context menu button then select the E to E menu item 182 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Information in this chapter includes 20 April 2005 Introducing Playlist Before using Playlist Starting Playlist Guide to using Playlist List View Guide to using Playlist Event View Changing the event list viewing mode Setting monitor information Creating a list Opening an existing list Inserting play events Using GPI output triggers in playlists Playing a list Viewing list properties Creating a looping list Locking a list Modifying events in the list Managing sections in the list Managing playlists Saving a list as a program M Series User Manual 183 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Introducing Playlist The Playlist control application allows you to build lists containing clips and programs stored on the iVDR The Playlist control application requires a single 1iVDR play channel The following describes the basic features supported when creating and playing lists e Two Playlist views The Playlist application has two views List View and Event View The List
79. set for use as a real time device The M Series iVDR is configured for automatic logon allowing unattended booting To avoid partial or total system failure do not modify any operating system settings unless approved by Grass Valley including but not limited to the following Do not use the User Manager Do not use the Disk Administrator Do not load any third party software Do not install any Windows updates other than critical updates without contacting Grass Valley Product Support 3 In the Windows taskbar select Start Settings Network and Dial up Connections and continue with standard Windows procedures to set up the M Series iVDR static IP address Be sure to select the optional 1GBaseT adapter not the standard 100BaseT adapter Set up hosts files 20 April 2005 Name resolution for the 1GBaseT adapter cannot be set to DNS or WINS You must set up a hosts file located in c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts on eachiVDR If you include the names and addresses of all the 1VDRs on the network then you can create one file and copy it to all the machines instead of editing the hosts file on each machine On eachiVDR set up the hosts files as follows 1 Open the following file using Notepad or some other text editor c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts 2 Enter text in a single line for each 1VDR including the local 1VDR The text format is simple First type the IP address then use the TAB key o
80. speed last set by the Jog Shuttle knob You can select Default to return the settings to their factory default values Refer to Using Front Panel controls on page 84 for more information on these settings and how they affect front panel operation 3 Change other settings as necessary in the Configuration dialog box then select OK to save and apply all changes at once 126 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Enabling rear panel audio monitor volume control Enabling rear panel audio monitor volume control If the optional front panel is installed on your iVDR selecting this check box allows you to use the headphone volume knob to control the rear panel audio monitor level If the optional front panel is not installed or this selection is cleared the rear panel audio monitor gain is unity 1 Select System choose Configuration and select the Panel button The Front Panel settings are displayed 2 Scroll down and locate the Rear panel audio monitor output setting then select the Controlled by front panel volume knob check box Configuration for iVDR 1 na System Rear panel audio monitor output setting Controlled by front panel volume knob Channel ey Start recording with the following button s Record only Play Record Full screen monitor mode Single channel monitor Multiple channel monitors Cancel 3 Change other settings as necessary in the Configuration dialog box then select O
81. the 1VDR user interface Setting up the 1VDR for streaming transfer with Profile XP Media Platforms has the following network requirements e No DHCP and WINS DNS etc Do not use automatic mechanisms for network settings Static IP addresses must be used on the 1iVDRs and Profile XP systems All name resolution must be through hosts files located on each networked device e The host name of all peeri1VDRs and Profile XP systems must be added to a host registry using the iVDR Configuration tool Summary of network setup tasks e Make 100BaseT network connections e Configure the 1VDR static IP address e Set up 1VDR hosts files e Add network hosts names for streaming e Configure the Profile XP static IP address e Test the network 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 47 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Make 100BaseT network connections Make 100BaseT network connections for both the 1VDR and the Profile XP system as shown in the following illustration Refer to Connecting the Ethernet network cabling on page 37 to locate 1VDR rear panel network connectors Refer to the Profile XP System Guide to locate network connections on the Profile XP rear panel Ethernet Switch 9252525250050 92009902000909 0200020200090 99999099909099 29099099099099 o o o o o o o fo DELELE 100BaseT ProfileXP 1__ Network S
82. the AVI format is used About sending files to removable media drives The following are operational considerations when sending files to removable media drives e Formatting CD R RW and DVD media You must format CD R RW or DVD disks before it can be used The iVDR includes the software for doing this formatting Refer to Formatting CD R RW and DVD disks on page 93 e Estimating clip file sizes AppCenter does not prevent you from sending a file that is larger than the space available on the target disk The transfer fails when the disk becomes full The space written to on R R disk types becomes unusable To avoid this problem check the clip size reported in the clip properties dialog box You can use this to estimate the disk space required for the clip e Best transfer performance File transfers to the DVD or CD ROM drives are handled concurrently up to four at a time Additional transfer requests are queued To enhance transfer performance you may try limiting transfers to one at a time 262 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Sending media to a file e Choosing DVD media You may experience considerably longer write times when using DVD RW media compared to other types such as RW R or R e Adding Removing USB devices The USB connectors on the rear panel and front panel can be used to connect a mouse keyboard USB drive or other USB device Do not plug or unplug these devices while the 1VDR is being used f
83. the M Series model M 322D NOTE If you modify the data rate setting you must restart AppCenter after closing the Configuration dialog box for the new data rate to take effect 7 Select the record range setting Select the Active picture plus VBI option if you need to record signals or data inserted in the vertical blanking interval VBI Otherwise you should select Active picture only option The VBI information is compressed along with the picture content You may need to increase the data rate if you have trouble with the integrity of the VBI signals during playback See also Vertical blanking interval compression on page 306 8 Select OK to save all changes at once 9 When prompted restart as required to put the video compression changes into effect 106 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Record channel settings Record channel settings Use the following procedures to configure each of your record channels R1 and R2 Topics are as follows e Configuring the video input on page 107 e Selecting the audio input for models with digital audio on page 111 e Adjusting the analog audio input trim on page 112 Configuring the video input The settings for video input are displayed on a continuous scrolling page within the Configuration Manager dialog box To work through all the settings simply start at the top and scroll down answering the questions as you go The following procedures explain
84. then use the pop up menu to choose the display mode or to control loop play mode See Selecting loop play on page 167 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 161 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Control Description and User Operation Set Mark in and Set These buttons are used to set new mark in or mark out points Position Mark out the clip to the desired frame then click or touch the In or Out buttons Unused media is not deleted To clear a mark hold down the button for longer than one second then choose Clear Mark in the pop up menu Marks are reset to the beginning or end of available media See Editing a clip Moving mark in mark out on page 174 Meter Bar Button q Displays the Meterbar which contains the audio play level controls and signal meters Clicking the Save button saves changes made to the clip audio level Clicking Unity returns the audio levels to the last saved level 00 29 39 01 Gang Unity Save v A1 A2 4 162 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Guide to using Player Cue View Guide to using Player Cue View Player s Cue view is used to add cue points to the a clip The Cue View allows you to set modify and jump to cue points on the loaded clip Pressing Cue in the toolbar displays the Cue view The following describes the basic controls in the Cue view Customizable Buttons Default buttons are shown Plaver
85. this selection to record analog composite video connected to the record channel s Composite input If a warning message is displayed about composite signal not present verify that and composite signal is connected When you select Analog composite additional input settings are available as explained in the next procedure Setting record channel NTSC pedestal Setting record channel NTSC pedestal 1 Make sure NTSC is selected as instructed in the previous procedure Selecting the video standard on page 102 If NTSC is not selected the pedestal setting is not available 2 Select System and choose Configuration then select the Channel button select the R1 or R2 tab and open the Video Input link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link 3 Locate the statement Analog composite input settings Configuration for iVDR 1 System S7 Video Input Channel What is your video input type Analog Composite SDI Component Analog composite input settings NTSC with Pedestal 7 5 IRE Use Automatic gain control Cancel 4 If you are operating with a standard NTSC input signal with 7 5 IRE setup then select the pedestal check box You must make this selection for both record channels For play channel settings refer to Adjusting analog composite output levels on page 114 108 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Configuring the video input 5 Chan
86. use a keyboard mouse and monitor rather than the touch panel as illustrated Alternate controls for keyboard mouse and monitor are marked with an asterisk and are provided on the VGA monitor only Load a clip into play channel 1 as explained in To play a clip Ov grass valley MAN Q a R P o 0 R2 p2 select Monitor A Locate a frame s Set in or out mark to current timecode coal ETT O 58 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 To create a playlist To create a playlist If your system has no Front Panel you must use a keyboard mouse and monitor rather than the touch panel as illustrated Alternate controls for keyboard mouse and monitor are marked with an asterisk and are provided on the VGA monitor only Select Monitor D Choose channel P2 ae A A P2 Player a l efa C grass valley Select Player Playlist n or b gt Playlist K Remote AMP 4 Select Clips 5 Drag clips to list Q Play the list P or b O O16 m Om A Oo 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 59 Chapter 2 Quick Start Procedures 60 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Chapter 3 Product Description 20 April 2005 Information in the chapter includes Product overview Determining storage capacity Front view with optional Front Panel Rear panel view Guide to using AppCenter Using K
87. using one of the following Select the Clips pane context menu button v then choose Options or Select an asset then select View Options in the asset context menu or Select the Options button in the Clips pane If the Options button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 2 Select the Sort tab in the Options dialog box 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 243 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Sort by Order Name Ascending Length Descending Create Date Modified Date Cancel 3 Choose the desired sorting attribute and order then select OK The Asset List will sort in the order specified NOTE When assets are added or renamed assets may not remain listed according to the selected sort order To re sort the assets repeat this procedure or press F5 on an external keyboard to refresh the Asset List Using Basic search The Search dialog box provides the basic search mode for locating assets anywhere in the iVDR media storage 1 Open the Search dialog box by doing one of the following e Select the Clips pane context menu button then choose Search or e Select the Search button in the Clips pane If the Search button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 2 To choose a specific bin to search select the Current Bin label in the Searc
88. while the clip is still recording or after record is stopped Inserting a playlist in a playlist You cannot insert an existing playlist into another playlist However you can save the playlist as a program and then insert the program in the playlist Related topic e Saving a list as a program on page 218 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 199 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Using GPI output triggers in playlists You can assign GPI output triggers to events and sections in a playlist The GPI outputs can be used to trigger external equipment when the list plays Before you can use GPI output triggers in a list you must assign GPI outputs to the play channel using Configuration Manager See Configuring GPI outputs on page 122 NOTE If you want to play a list that was created on another play channel you must ensure that GPI triggers assigned to the play channels use the same names otherwise the GPI triggers will not occur Using identical GPI naming also allows copying and pasting sections and events between lists To trigger GPI outputs 1 Use Configuration Manager to assign GPI outputs to the current Play channel Follow instructions in Configuring GPI outputs on page 122 then return to this procedure 2 Select an event or section in the playlist then open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select the context menu button e e Select the Properties button Se
89. 03 04 39 PM Clip_2 05 27 03 04 39 PM A Properti Clip_3 05 27 03 04 44 PM Load Search 246 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Viewing recent search results Viewing recent search results The last four search results are retained You can view the most recent search results using the Current Bin label e Select the Current Bin label then choose a search result R1 Recorder Pi Player R2 Recorder P2 Player Look in Search Created Last 5 Days g l Inad Organize Bins Properti detant l Recycle Bin Search Y Search Y Created Last 5 Days Search Y Created 097 29 03 10 29703 Search default Modified 09 29 03 10 29 03 Using Advanced Search The Search dialog box provides the advanced search mode which provides an extended set of attributes for locating assets anywhere in the iVDR media storage 1 Open the Search dialog box by doing one of the following e Select the Clips pane context menu button v then choose Search or e Select the Search button in the Clips pane If the Search button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 2 To choose a specific bin to search select the Current Bin label in the Search dialog box then select a bin from the drop down list Otherwise the search runs on the entire disk volume V 3 Choose Advanced search to vi
90. 03 09 44 AM Search Tracks Video 1 Audio 2 TC 1 Details view displays assets with both a thumbnail and a detailed text description 3 Select the Sort tab then choose how you want assets sorted Sort by Order Name Ascending Length Descending Create Date Modified Date Cancel M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Selecting Split or Full screen mode Selecting Split or Full screen mode The Clips pane can be displayed in split screen or full screen mode Full screen mode provides a larger space to display assets Split screen allows operations between applications for example drag and drop between panes e To toggle between Split and Full Screen mode select the Clips button in the toolbar then select the Split or Full Screen button Oe Lookin default Load Clip_1 1 AIN E a i Search o Bitar fect Hy Clip_2 1 Clip_3 Properti Mecoroer New Bin ip_ ip_ ip_ View Op lt A DAGE o dan T Clip_9 Recorder 1 No clip loaded Full Screen Select Button 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 229 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Working with bins This section includes e Changing current bin using Look in drop down list on page 230 e Changing current bin on page 230 e Creating a new bin on page 231 e Deleting a bin on page 232 e Renaming a bin on page 233 Changing current bin using Look in drop
91. 04 D0 45 00 04 ey Bai Ba a Hi a P H oQ 144 gt gt I gt e VAR Making RS 422 and Ethernet connections Protocol control is available through four 9 pin RS 422 serial port connectors mounted on the 1VDR rear panel or through an Ethernet network connection AMP only Refer to the following sections to make cable connections e Connecting RS422 on page 53 e Connecting the Ethernet network cabling on page 37 280 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Starting a remote control protocol application Starting a remote control protocol application The protocol applications require a channel on which to run If the channel is currently being used by another application you can use the following steps to select the protocol application Selecting the protocol application causes the current channel application to exit when the protocol application is started To start a protocol application on a channel 1 In the toolbar select Split Screen 2 In the toolbar select Monitor Select Monitor Meee 1322 3u S d 94 20155 06 2 14 19 37 10 14 F 14 20 56 z 02 15 01 26 MOSA Omi uie clip 2 cip5 Clip_11 lt no clip loaded gt Control Application in the drop down list Recorder Player Recorder Player Playlist Remote AMP Remote BYW Remote VDCP Player 2 No clip loaded Select Split Screen 3 In the Monito
92. 05 On systems without the optional Front Panel installed the Windows desktop is oversized at power up and scrolls as you move the mouse This is because the display adapter card in the iVDR always starts in 640x480 mode even though the Windows screen size is set to 800x600 To easily change the display adapter settings press the CTRL ALT C hot key sequence when AppCenter is fully initialized after power up to switch the display adapter card to 800x600 display settings If you inadvertently select this key sequence on aniVDR with a front panel press the CTRL ALT L hot key sequence to return to 640x480 display settings which is required for front panel operation GVGrass vall ley o j ororo ororo Or oL OOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 5 Oo 20200 0202020202020 6050 60 0 0 E e ORE S Ro eR E oFo2020209090 l8 0202026202586 202862625 0202626 P02626L0L6L6L5 26 0 6 6 0 595P G9 0900090 O IMPORTANT On systems without the optional front panel press the Ctrl Alt C hot key sequence when AppCenter is fully initialized after power up to set the correct display settings M Series User Manual 29 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Powering on and shutting down The following sections provide procedures for power on and shutdown To power on Unlatch and lower the drive bay door Push the standby switch Wait for the Windows operating system to startu
93. 15 GXF export to file using 262 20 April 2005 H headphone jack 84 host names adding 39 44 50 IEEE 1394 connecting 148 importing from 148 selecting 148 illegal characters 233 234 import AVI file encoding requirements 258 307 from device 258 260 from file 258 from FireWire IEEE 1394 see 148 injury precautions 15 internal media disks size 66 J Jog Shuttle knob selecting ranges 126 K keyboard shortcuts 79 keyboard connecting 26 L linked assets finding 250 list adding GPI output triggers 200 creating 196 inserting events 196 locating 218 locking 204 moving events 210 213 opening a list 196 playing a list using GPI input triggers 202 using keyboard shortcuts 202 using onscreen or front panel controls 202 properties viewing 190 203 renaming lists 216 saving a list as a program 218 section events add pause to all 214 events maximum number 185 events remove pause from all 215 moving 213 M Series User Manual 319 Index thumbnail changing 217 timecode selecting 216 locating assets 243 locking assets 241 log files exporting 91 92 logging database 91 92 loop mode in Playlist 203 loop play mode selecting 161 loop record See continuous record LTC connector 315 mechanical specifications 301 media disks 66 displaying available storage time 141 156 metadata 251 adding or modifying 253 clearing 255 deleting 257 searching 249 Meter Bar button 162 minimizing AppC
94. 2 In AppCenter toolbar select System then choose Configuration 3 Select the Hosts button The network host names are displayed Configuration for iVDR 1 Add System Host name Controller id Modify Channel Remove GPI Panel Cancel 4 Select Add to open the Add Host dialog box then do the following a Select the Enter host name text entry control then enter the computer name of a peer iVDR Make sure to enter the exact computer name Any differences will result in being unable to connect to the iVDR Add Host x Enter host name Enter controller id Cancel b If you are using remote protocols to perform video network transfers you must use the following steps to add a unique Controller ID for each host otherwise 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 45 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR you can ignore this step and proceed to step c Select the Enter controller ID text entry control Enter the controller ID of the 1VDR then select OK Make sure to enter a number between and 255 that is unique to the iVDR c Select OK in the Add Host dialog box 5 Repeat step 4 for the remaining 1VDRs 6 In the Configuration dialog box select OK to save settings Once the host names are added the 1VDR is ready for streaming operation Refer to Importing assets from another 1VDR or Profile XP system on page 260 and Sending assets to another machine on page 265 f
95. 6 and Loading a clip from the Clips pane Locate Locates the currently loaded clip in the Clips pane See Locating a clip on page 167 Help Opens online help Auto Subclips The auto subclip check box changes the way that the subclip mode behaves When it is NOT checked clips have to be accepted manually When it is checked a subclip will be created as soon as the user sets a mark out See About Auto Subclip mode on page 181 E to E When E to E mode is enabled the output video and audio switches to the record channel input when the play channel is stopped or when no clip is loaded If E to E is disabled the output freezes on the last frame of video See Selecting E to E mode on page 182 O Thumbnail Used to visually identify the clip By default the thumbnail is generated using the 16th frame of video To change the thumbnail position the clip to the desired frame then click or touch the thumbnail See Changing the clip thumbnail image on page 176 Q Time Dome Progress E 00 00 03 23 Progress gt with media 00 00 02 15 marks Progress P amp loop play 00 00 08 21 enabled This multi function control displays play progress or play progress with media marks which shows the relative position of mark in mark out points in the clip The timecode underneath indicates play time remaining The Time Dome is also used to enable loop play Select the Time Dome
96. 7 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Locating a list in the Clips pane e In List view select the list icon or time dome then select the context menu button _ and choose Locate The bin containing the list is shown in the Clips pane Saving a list as a program Playlists can be saved as a program so that they can be managed as a single clip This saves the events in the list but nothing that breaks the flow of playout such as pauses between events or sections Saving a list does not consume media storage space since the program merely references the source clip media that is already stored in the media file system If the source clips are deleted the media referenced by the program is preserved See Deleting an asset on page 239 You can insert programs into other playlists or load and play them using the standard Player application In Player you can edit the program mark in and mark out points providing the source clips referenced by the program have not been deleted If that is the case 1 second of media is preserved before and after the program mark in and mark out allowing some trimming 1 Load the playlist in the Playlist pane AETA Aa iN 2 In List view select the context menu button and choose Save As Program N E aer e J a me _ Tee Sey aL ae i i g DS bati a x Clip_2 aN ht List_1 Program Name Program_1 3 Use the Look in control to change the current bin
97. AA Adie ee The Goto Timecode dialog appears Goto Timecode x ht bed i E Clear Back Back Space Select to enter a relative timecode Clear Select to clear entry Absolute Select to enter an absolute timecode 2 Enter a timecode value using one of the following e To enter a relative timecode value select the or key enter timecode then select Ok e To enter an absolute timecode value select the key enter timecode then select Ok The new frame is displayed is cued for the channel Related topics e Loading a clip from the Clips pane on page 165 e Loading a clip from Player on page 166 e Using the scrub bar in the Goto Dialog on page 169 168 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Using the scrub bar in the Goto Dialog Using the scrub bar in the Goto Dialog The Goto dialog provides a scrub bar which allows you to search for video in much the same way as using a shuttle knob To use the Goto Timecode dialog 1 With a clip loaded in the Player pane do one of the following e Select the Goto button in Play view e Select the Play view menu button i then choose Goto The Goto Timecode dialog appears Goto Timecode x 09 20 30 14 Clear Back Scrub Bar Click and drag while monitoring channel output 2 Select and drag the Scrub Bar uu while monitoring play channel output 3 Click Ok to close Related topics e Loading a
98. Battery Replacement To avoid damage replace only with the same or equivalent type Dispose of used battery according to the circuit board manufacturer s instructions Safety Terms and Symbols Terms in This Manual These terms may appear in this manual AN WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that can result in personal injury or loss of life AN CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that may result in damage to equipment or other property or which may cause equipment crucial to your business environment to become temporarily non operational Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately accessible as one reads the marking WARNING indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product AN DANGER high voltage a Protective ground earth terminal AN ATTENTION refer to manual 16 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Service Safety Summary WARNING The service instructions in this manual are intended for A use by qualified service personnel only To avoid personal injury do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Refer to all safety summaries before performing service Do Not Service Alone Do not perform i
99. C 525 Line PAL 625 Line Reference source is present System is locked to reference What is the default unity audio level 0 dB Configuring system settings Transfer Monitor E Sorem NT ett Sending Det Exh Nice 1 Ge les RS cS Importing cs sce Niti VpS Dat CM Quckemetd7 cw A Sete prong opt Properties Monitoring media transfers including network transfers and file import export Shutdown Dialog Box Power off or restart the iVDR Restart Stotacge Maintenance Shut Down Online Help F Select Tools then Help in 4 the AppCenter Toolbar LLI Product Description Working with Playlists Configuration Using the Monitor Pane Recording Clips WETE T ate AGIS IET Playing and Editing Remote Control Protocols 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 75 Chapter 3 Product Description Conventions used in the AppCenter interface The following table describes the graphical conventions used for the user controls in the AppCenter interface These graphical elements are used throughout the interface to indicate such items as drop down lists and context menus o R1 Recorder P1 Player X R2 Recorder P2 Player N V default v System Tools Clip_14 00 00 100 O 9 clip 00 02 10 17 A Drop down List Monitor Scroll Button v Assignable Button Groups Context Menu bi Eject Button Text E
100. Cancel 3 In the Clip Properties dialog box select Media 4 On the Media page select the Erase Unused Media option 5 In the Clip Properties dialog box select OK Unused media is erased when you select the OK button and the Properties dialog box is closed After erasing unused media the following is true e Media outside the clip marks is erased except that portion referenced by a subclip playlist event or program e All subclips and events generated from the source clip will retain 1 second of media before the mark in and after the mark out 240 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Locking an asset Locked assets cannot be renamed deleted or modified in any way 20 April 2005 Locking an asset 1 Select the asset in the Asset List using the front panel touch screen the front panel selection knob or a mouse 2 To view the Properties dialog box for the selected asset do one of the following e Select the Clips pane context menu button v then choose Properties or e Select Properties in the asset context menu or e Select the Properties button in the Clips pane If the Properties button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 The Asset Properties dialog appears Clip_1 Properties x j Mame Clip_1 Type Clip B Location i fdefault Tracks Format Compression Size Length Created Modified Locked
101. Clip_2 1 Clip_3 Displays the asset name and thumbnail image for each asset in the bin Playlists are displayed as a stack of thumbnails You can change the video frame used to generate the thumbnail See Changing the clip thumbnail image on page 176 Text view Gi eas Ca eee Look ine CGR es Se a a RH Clip_10 08 17 03 09 44 AM Load Clip_10 1 08 17 03 09 44 AM Properti Clip_10 2 08 18 03 05 09 PM List_1 08 17 03 09 44 AM ne pi tg List_2 08 17 03 09 44 AM The text view displays an icon and name for each asset and one attribute of your M Series User Manual 227 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane choice To select an asset attribute select the Show drop down list in the View Options dialog box then select one of the following attributes Attribute display options e Create Date e Modified Date e Length e Type MPEG or DV25 e Location full path The following table describes symbols shown in Text view Asset Symbols used Asset Type in the Text View Clips with audio and video Video only clip Playlist Details view O R1 Recorder P1 Player Lookin default R2 Recorder O P2 Player Name Clip_10 2 Type Mpeg Clip Format PAL Length 00 00 05 05 Modified 08 18 03 05 09 PM Load J Tracks Video 1 Audio 2 TC 1 G Properti Name List_1 Type Mpeg List Format PAL v Length 00 00 33 11 Modified 08 17
102. Configuration Manager dialog select the context menu button then choose Restore Defaults The default settings are loaded into Configuration Manager but they have not yet been saved and put into effect 3 Click OK to save settings and close Configuration Manager 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 101 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Selecting the video standard The video standard setting applies to all record and play channels 1 On the Toolbar select System and choose Configuration The Configuration Manager dialog opens 2 On the Configuration Manager dialog select System The System configuration settings appear Configuration for iVDR 1 What is your system video standard ae a NTSC 525 Line PAL 625 Line GPI Reference source is present Panel System is locked to reference What is the default unity audio level Hosts 0 dB 4dB 8 dB Cancel 3 Select the video standard for your system either NTSC 525 Line or PAL 625 Line This setting applies to all channels 4 Change other settings as necessary in the Configuration dialog box then select OK to save and apply all changes at once 5 When prompted restart the iVDR The restart is required to put the video standard change into effect Setting the audio reference level The audio reference level setting applies to all record and play channels 1 On the Toolbar select System and choose Configuration The Co
103. Connector BNC 75 ohm No loop through Max Cable Length 225 meters 738 ft Belden 8281 type cable Return Loss gt 15db 5Mhz to 270Mhz 4 Available only on models equipped with digital audio 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 301 Appendix A Specifications 302 Composite Analog Video Parameter Specification Composite Video Standard NTSC 525 line 59 94Hz Conforms to SMPTE170M or PAL 625 line 50Hz Conforms CCIR Report 624 Number of Inputs 1 per record channel Number of Outputs M 122A M 222A 2 per play channel M 222D M322D 1 per play channel Connectors BNC 75 ohm a The 1VDR can record signals from most non timebase corrected signal sources such as color under video playback devices i e VHS or U Matic VTRs and low cost cameras However for reliable recording performance some devices may require external signal conditioning products i e timebase correction Genlock Reference Characteristics Description Signal Type NTSC PAL Color Black Composite Analog Connectors 2 BNC 75 ohm passive loop through Color Field Detection Based on SCH Phase Correct color framing for signals having an average SCH phase 40 Lockup 10 Once locked to color field it will stay locked over a range of 0 to 90 Burst Frequency Lock Range PAL 10 Hz at subcarrier NTSC 20 Hz at subcarrier Signal Amplitude Lock Range Stays locked to
104. Installing the M Series iVDR Accessing the Windows desktop For some tasks such as configuring for Ethernet networking you must access the Windows operating system Use the following procedure to minimize AppCenter To access the Windows desktop do the following e In the Toolbar select System then choose Minimize A AppCenter minimizes and the Windows desktop appears To maximize select the maximize button on the AppCenter title bar CAUTION The M Series is not a general purpose Windows workstation The Windows configuration on the iVDR has been specifically set for use as a real time device The M Series iVDR is configured for automatic logon allowing unattended booting To avoid partial or total system failure do not modify any operating system settings unless approved by Grass Valley including but not limited to the following Do not use the User Manager Do not use the Disk Administrator Do not load any third party software Do not install any Windows updates other than critical updates without contacting Grass Valley Product Support Configuring for basic operation Use the following procedures to configure the iVDR for basic record and play operations under local control For complete configuration procedures refer to Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Configuration tasks Select system settings on page 32 Select the video input on page 34 Select the audio input dig
105. K to save and apply all changes at once Setting start record button sequence You can configure which front panel buttons you have to press to start recording a clip To set the record button sequence 1 Select System choose Configuration then select the Panel button The Front Panel settings are displayed 2 Scroll down and locate the record button settings 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 127 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Contiguration for iVDR 1 bd System Rear panel audio monitor output setting Controlled by front panel volume knob Channel ei Start recording with the following button s Record only Play Record Full screen monitor mode Single channel monitor Multiple channel monitors Cancel 3 Specify the buttons to start recording 4 Change other settings as necessary in the Configuration dialog box then select OK to save and apply all changes at once Selecting full screen monitor mode This setting specifies how AppCenter s Monitor pane is displayed in full screen mode either single channel or four channel display See also Split Screen and Full Screen Buttons on page 73 1 Select System choose Configuration and select the Panel button The Front Panel settings are displayed 2 Scroll down and locate the full screen monitor mode settings 128 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 Selecting full screen monitor mode Configurati
106. Local or Protocol only The green status LED indicates the port is receiving protocol commands Frotocol Monitor x R2 AMP Port P local P2 AMP Port P1 local 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 297 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols 298 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Appendix A Specifications 20 April 2005 Specifications in this chapter AC power specification Environmental specifications Mechanical specifications Electrical specifications Operational specifications M Series User Manual 299 Appendix A Specifications AC power specification The M Series iVDR AC power specification is shown in the following table Characteristic Specification Mains Input Voltage 100V to 240V auto range 50 60Hz Power consumption 300W typical 450W maximum AN WARNING Always use a grounded outlet to supply power to the system Always use a power cable with a grounded plug such as the one supplied with the system Environmental specifications Characteristic Specification Ambient Temperature 40 to 60 C Non Operating Ambient Temperature 10 to 40 C Operating Relative Humidity Operating 20 to 80 from 5 to 45 C Non Operating 10 to 80 from 30 to 60 C Do not operate with visible moisture on the circuit boards Operating Altitude To 10 000 feet IEC 950 compliant to 2000 meters
107. Media Platform since all transfers are initiated from the iVDR The Profile XP Media Platform does not need to resolve host names After configuring the host file proceed to the next procedure Add network hosts names for streaming Add network hosts names for streaming You must add the host names of all peer 1VDRs on the network that support streaming transfers Adding host names is required to allow selection of networked iVDRs in the AppCenter user interface and to provide a successful network connection The host names added appear in the Import and Send to dialog boxes In addition if you are using remote protocol to perform video network transfers you Il need to assign a unique Controller ID number for each host name If you are not using remote protocol for network transfers you can leave the Controller Id blank To add a network host name 1 Start AppCenter if it is not already running using the desktop shortcut 2 In AppCenter toolbar select System then choose Configuration 3 Select the Hosts button The network host names are displayed 50 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 100BaseT Configuration iVDR and Profile XP streaming Configuration for iVDR 1 lt Add Host name Controller id im 3 oe ProfilexP 1 4 system Channel Remove Panel Cancel 4 Select Add to open the Add Host dialog box then do the following a Select the Enter host name text entry contr
108. Modifying Configuration Enable VITC generator What lines should be used when generating ITC timecode 16 Default Test mode Colorbars output Cancel Use the scroll button if necessary to locate the setting 4 Select Colorbars output The selection is displayed immediately You can monitor the channel output to see the 75 colorbar signal This setting is for test purposes only so it is not saved When you select OK to close Configuration Manager or clear the colorbar check box the video output returns to normal Adjusting video output timing Some playout timing adjustment may be required to satisfy downstream timing requirements in your system If so adjust playout timing as follows 1 Select System and choose Configuration select Channel select the R1 or R2 tab and open the Video Output Timing link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link 118 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 Adjusting video output timing Configuration for iVDR 1 x System 7 J Video Output Timing gt Frames Lines coarse Samples fine Analog Sub Pixel SC 2 Adjust video output timing using the controls as described e Frames delays video output Range NTSC 0 1 frames PAL 0 3 frames e Lines coarse delays the video output Range NTSC 525 lines 0 524 lines PAL 625 lines 0 624 lines e Samples fine delays the video outp
109. Pi Control Add Cue Remove Goto 73 20 50 28 r 13 20 28 22 13 20 37 13 13 20 50 29 Current cCueList countdown Context Frame Timecode Menu Timecode 00 00 00 00 Mark In Cue Mark Out V ai A Player 1 Clip_i playing 1 001 Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignments to best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one second opens the button pop up menu which lists the alterative button choices Add Cue same as selecting the Add Cue menu item Remove Cue removes the selected cue Goto used to jump to the selected cue the next cue or to a specific timecode See Jumping to a specific timecode on page 168 Rename opens text entry dialog box to rename the selected cue Create Clip same as Create Clip menu item See Creating subclips in Cue view on page 181 Create All same as Create All Clips menu item See Creating subclips in Cue view on page 181 Cue Selection cues the first selected cue point for playback showing a still frame of video for the cue point See Jump to the selected cue point on page 171 2 Current Frame Timecode 16 27 13 29 Indicates the recorded timecode of the current frame being played The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed when there is no rec
110. Properties dialog box is displayed which has two pages General and Data The General page is self explanatory The Data page is used to add metadata to the program To learn more refer to Working with asset metadata on page 252 Viewing bin properties 1 In the Clips pane touch or click the Current Bin label then choose a bin from the list P1 Player System Lookin Tools J Organize Bins Load default Monitor Properti mybin Search Recycle Bin 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box select a bin The bin properties are displayed in the Organize Bins dialog box 274 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 FE Bnewsclips Type Bin Items 12 Created 07 29 03 09 15 AM Viewing volume properties New Bin Explore Viewing volume properties Rename Delete 1 In the Clips pane select the Current Bin label then select the Organize Bins System Tools Monitor R1 Recorder P1 Player Lookin default 4 Organize Bins Load default Properti mybin Search Recycle Bin gt R2 Recorder P2 Playe 20 April 2005 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box select a disk volume The volume properties are displayed in the Organize Bins dialog box Dv Type Volume Used Space 60449 MB Free Space 44547 MB Total Space 104996 MB New Bin Explore default Current newsclips M Series User Manual 275 Cha
111. R assets using the Clips pane Send To File feature will fail if the disk media is not formatted Be sure to format the disk media before using the Send To File feature To format a CD R RW or DVD disk 1 Connect an external keyboard if needed If you normally operate your 1VDR using the optional Front Panel touch screen you should connect keyboard and mouse before proceeding The keyboard is required if want to name the CD R RW or DVD disk and you will likely find it easier to make selections using a keyboard and mouse rather than the touch screen You might need to restart Windows to make the mouse and keyboard operational 2 In AppCenter select System Minimize The Windows desktop appears 3 Insert a blank disk in the CD ROM or DVD drive 4 In Windows Explorer open the CD ROM or DVD drive A message appears Stomp DLA Ea DLA cannot use this blank media until it has been formatted would wou like to format this media now 5 Answer Yes to format the disk A dialog appears 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 93 Chapter 3 Product Description Format F Stomp DLA o zm a 6 Accept Quick as the format type You can optionally enter a volume name Select Start to begin the format operation A message appears 7 Answer Yes to confirm the format A progress dialog appears Format F Stomp DLA Fante When formatting is complete a message appears 8 Select OK to compl
112. T OS are seven ctses sind hen ela tee eee 15 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Making Connections for basic operation cccccceececessseeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeesseaaeees 22 M 122A M 222A Recorder input CONNECTIONS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeess 22 M 122A M 222A Player output CONNECTIONS ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeess 23 M 222D M 322D Recorder Input CONNECTIONS ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 24 M 222D M 322D Player output CONNECTIONS ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneess 25 Keyboard mouse and VGA monitor CONNECTIONS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 26 Audio MONIIN COMME CHONS ceteris cect exces ees aa aaia Eii 27 Reference Video CONNECTIONS ccccseeccecccsececceeeeeecceuseececneueeseseeseesssaneeesanaass 28 POWER CONNEC ON caststtges nacre ceca tac seaman A ETN 29 VGA Display hot key Sequence ccccccsssesseeeeeceeeesececeeecaeaseeceeeasauaaueeeeeeessaaeeeeess 29 Powering on and Shutting GOWN lt cai2c8 ca eran ee ates adele ete 30 WOO OW CV Oras sated ot sacs he aactacs e a A 30 TO SUIGOW Or restarle nsin a nlenctan a E ea E 30 Accessing the Windows desktop cccssesseeeceecceesseeeeeesaaeeseeeeeecaaaaeeeeeseseasaess 32 Configuring for bDasicoperalON es rees aarre aar E a TAERE 32 Select system setings pie en a a ea i Ra OE ERE 32 selec INE VIGO Moule a R ound een aceemeaseeames aeuceeaan ea
113. User Manual 173 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Editing a clip Moving mark in mark out Every clip has a mark in point and a mark out point which refer to the first and last frames displayed when the clip is played When first recorded clip marks are set to the beginning and end of available media You can edit the clip marks in order to reference only the desired media When clip marks are moved unused media is not deleted and the marks can be moved again or reset again to display all available media See also Editing a clip Clearing mark in mark out on page 175 The following restrictions apply when editing clip marks e Mark in must precede the mark out e Marks cannot be set outside the recorded media e Marks cannot be changed on a clip that is still being recorded NOTE If more media exists after the current mark a lt lt lt or gt gt gt symbol is displayed beneath the mark In Out timecode To permanently remove media outside the marks refer to Erasing a clip s unused media on page 239 To move clip marks load the clip in the Player pane then use one of the following methods e Using the In Out buttons on page 174 e Using the timecode entry controls on page 174 e Using the clip length control on page 175 Using the In Out buttons To move clip marks 1 Use the transport controls to locate the desired frame 2 In Play view select In ns to set mark in point or Out Out to set m
114. View allows you to manage a lists insert move or modify events and to control playout of the list The Event View allows you to edit event properties event name in mark out mark length and audio level e Editing lists Events in a list can be renamed moved or removed e Trimming an event in the list Trimming an event only affects the event mark in and mark out points but does not affect its source clip marks e Event transitions Transitions between all events in a list is a cut 1 e the last frame of an event is followed by the first frame of the next event e Loop on a section Sections are provided within the list to provide flexibility during playout A section can be set up to loop indefinitely The section can be taken out of the loop by manual intervention e Loop on a list Lists can be set up to loop indefinitely The list can be taken out of the loop by manual intervention play goto or stop e Pause at the end of events or sections Events and sections can pause playout at their end At event pauses you can choose to show black show E to E freeze on last frame or freeze on next event e Saving a playlist as a program Playlists can be saved as a program This saves the media and transitions but nothing that breaks the flow of playout such as pauses You can insert programs into other playlists or load and play them using the standard Player application e GPI output triggers The 1VDR provides
115. X Add System Host name Controller id Modify Channel Remove GPI Panel Cancel 4 Select Add to open the Add Host dialog box then do the following a Select the Enter host name text entry control then enter the computer name of a peer 1VDR Make sure to enter the exact computer name Any differences will result in being unable to connect to the 1VDR Enter host name Enter controller id b If you are using remote protocols to perform video network transfers you must use the following steps to add a unique Controller ID for each host otherwise you can ignore this step and proceed to step c Select the Enter controller ID text entry control Enter the controller ID of the 1VDR then select OK Make sure to enter a number between and 255 that is unique to the iVDR c Select OK in the Add Host dialog box 5 Repeat step 4 for the remaining 1VDRs 40 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 100BaseT Configuration Data and streaming between iVDRs 6 In the Configuration dialog box select OK to save settings Once the host names are added the iVDR is ready for streaming operation Refer to Importing assets from another 1VDR or Profile XP system on page 260 and Sending assets to another machine on page 265 for procedures on transferring media NOTE If you have trouble try using the ping utility in the Windows command prompt using either the IP address or host nam
116. a ee 21 H e Look for timecode on lines Clear the Detect VITC signal automatically option then use the sliders or number entry controls to specify the line numbers where the VITC pair can be found When two pairs of VITC signals are present you can use this mode to specify the lines on which to find the matched set 110 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Selecting the audio input for models with digital audio Detect VITC signal automatically Look for timecode on lines 9 6 22 RHC eA a NAC Al e e You can select Default to return VITC settings to their factory default values NOTE VITC reader adjustments are immediate You do not need to close to save settings The VITC present indicator will light when the VITC reader is configured properly 5 Select OK to close Selecting the audio input for models with digital audio You must select the audio input for 1VDR models equipped with digital audio To select the audio input for a record channel 1 Select System then choose Configuration 2 Select the Channel button then select the R1 or R2 tab 3 Open the Audio Input link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link 4 Locate the question What is your audio input type S7 Audio Input What is your audio input type Analog AES SDI Embedded Group 1 Group 1 Group 2 Missing r Cancel 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 111 Chapt
117. ack is anchored to the floor so that it cannot tip over when the i VDR is extended out of the rack 2 Insert the ends of the chassis sections into the slide out sections 3 Push the chassis toward the rack until the chassis sections lock into the intermediate sections 4 Press the stop latches in the intermediate sections and push the chassis toward the rack until the latches snap into their holes Stop Latch 5 Again press the stop latches and push the cabinet fully into the rack 6 Insert and tighten the front panel retaining screws Making Rack Slide Adjustments After installation binding may occur if the slide tracks are not properly adjusted To adjust the tracks 1 Slide the chassis out approximately 10 inches 2 Slightly loosen the mounting screws holding the tracks to the front of the rails and allow the tracks to seek an unbound position 3 Tighten the mounting screws and check the tracks for smooth operation by sliding the chassis in and out of the rack several times 4 Tighten the front panel retaining screws once the cabinet is in place within the rack to complete the installation 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 313 Appendix B Rack mounting and Connector Pin outs Adjusting rack mount brackets The four position adjustable rack mount brackets allows the 1VDR to accommodate different rack depth limitations The rack mount bracket is shipped in the forward position allowing the 1VDR front pa
118. ack mounting and Connector Pin outs 316 Analog audio connector pinouts Audio In 7 N Audio Out Connector 2 1 1 2 Connector female A A male 3 3 Pin Audio in Pin Audio Out l Signal Ground 1 Signal Ground 2 2 3 3 GPI I O connector pinouts 13 ot 1 25 14 Pin Signal Pin Signal l Output 1 14 Input 1 2 Output 2 15 Input 2 3 Output 3 16 Input 3 Output 4 17 Input 4 5 Output 5 18 Input 5 6 Output 6 19 Input 6 7 Output 7 20 Input 7 8 Output 8 21 Input 8 9 Output 9 22 Input 9 10 Output 10 23 Input 10 11 Output 11 24 Input 11 12 Output 12 23 Input 12 13 Ground M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Index A active channel 77 active pane 77 Advanced Search about 247 adding search criteria 249 AES EBU audio selecting 111 specification 303 AMP 278 analog audio connector pin out 316 analog composite in selecting 107 analog Sub Pixel 118 AppCenter applications standard 74 control options local 71 control options remote 71 exiting to Windows 30 keyboard shortcuts 79 minimizing 32 82 reposition on the desktop 73 starting 70 toolbar description 73 tools standard 75 user interface conventions 76 user interface overview 72 application drop down list 78 assignable buttons 77 audio analog audio specification 303 audio monitor level control 127 rear panel
119. aeeees 82 Guide to using the Front Panel cccccceccssssessseeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeceeeeeeeesaessaeaeeeseeeeees 83 Using Front Panel Controls ccccccssssseeeeccceeeeeeeeeecceeeseeeeeseaeeaeeeeeseeageeeseessaas 84 Ting he tont Deane setri cicatricial ns sae hab Nats a Maite 85 Cleaning ne touch Scree esien deserted a E eden eecenacess beadieededelai 85 Calibrating the front panel touch SCIEeN ccccccececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 85 Adjusting front panel display brightness ccccccccsecesseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeessanaeeess 86 Enabling the VGA MOnnOMOUlO Ut scc3scanciaes codecs Becechieausdacuneelaesbataceceu be cece 86 Monitoring the system using the StatUSBal ccesccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaanaaaeees 87 Interpreting StatuSPane button ICONS ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeas 87 Message types displayed in the StatUSBar cccccseeseeeeeesssseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeas 88 Usmgthe Status Pane seese a 89 Opening the Status Fane aora e E E E 89 Showing iVDR software versions ccceecceeeccceeeeceeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeesesaeseaaaeseeeeeeees 90 Copying Messages to the clip board ccccccccceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesaesaaeaeeeeseeeees 90 Cleaning messages emnet ae waded else E a ae 90 Glosing the StatusP ane zane a E atten eo 90 EXPONO LOC TCS cass acai cece cut eat a a A N 91 Writing data to the CD R RW and DVD CT ivVeS ccccccseee
120. age 152 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 285 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols Control Description and User Operation Clip Name Edit Control Displays the clip s name and location in the media storage system Clip Clip_i To rename the clip touch or click the Clip Name then use the Location default onscreen or external keyboard to enter text To change the current bin 1 e the target location for recording clips refer to Changing the current bin on page 154 O Local Protocol Mode Context Menu Options New Clip Preview Properties Locate Select Timecode Source Options Opens the Options dialog box New Clip Used to create and name a clip prior to starting the recording A default clip name is generated by incrementing some seed name for example Clip_2 if the last clip created was Clip_1 To rename the clip after or during record select the clip name and enter a new name using the onscreen or external keyboard If a clip is already loaded New Clip is disabled Ejecting the clip enables the control See To record a clip using New Clip on page 142 Preview Loads the clip into Player or Protocol Player on the corresponding play channel If there is a clip already loaded as the Current clip on the Protocol Player then this clip will be loaded as Preview clip Properties Opens the Properties dialog for the currently loaded clip See Viewing clip properties on page
121. ail loop play mode Click to set to Click to adjust current frame audio level timecode Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignments to best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one second a o opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative button Subclip choices l O Goto Same as selecting the Goto context menu item Load Subclip Same as selecting the Subclip context menu item Erd Load Same as selecting the Load context menu item ropa Properties Properties Same as selecting the Properties context menu item Locate Same as selecting the Locate context menu item Locate Clip Timecode Indicates the recorded timecode of the current frame being played The x 3 5 timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed when there is no 09 20 30 13 recorded timecode Stop mode is indicated by PB Play Back or EE E to E Refer to Selecting E to E mode on page 182 for more information on these stop modes 160 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Guide to using Player Play View Control Description and User Operation Clip Name amp Current Displays the clip s name and location in the video storage file system Bin To rename the clip touch or click the Clip Name then use the onscreen Clio Clio 1 or external keyboard to enter a new name See Renaming a clip in arene Pl
122. ane O P1 AMP 3 In the protocol player click or touch the thumbnail image to place the current clip thumbnail in front of the preview thumbnail 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 293 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols S Clip lt no clip loaded gt Options Oe Goto v ai A AMP Player 2 No clip loaded 4 Load a clip from the Clips pane using one of the following e Click or touch the clip and drag it to the Player pane e Rotate the front panel Selection Knob to select a clip then push in on the knob to load the clip e Select the clip then choose the Load button in the Clips pane e Double click on an clip e Select a clip then press Enter on an external keyboard The clip is loaded as the current clip and the thumbnail appears P2 10 42 76 75 00 00 26 14 Tae clip Clip Load B i TIRER E N i cc n Location M AS default Options O Goto 10 42 16 15 10 42 42 27 OU 00 26 12 0000 2611 OS y ai az 4 AMP Player 2 Clip_1 cued NOTE You can load a preview clip only if the Current preset clip is loaded 294 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Skipping to the preview clip during playout 5 Load the preview as described in the previous step 4 The preview thumbnail appears behind the current clip thumbnail You can click the thumbnail image to bring the preview image to the foreground without effecting current clip pla
123. application allows you to play media stored on the iVDR including clips and programs Player requires a single play channel Player has two views Play View and Cue View The Control view allows you to play clips trim clips by modifying clip mark in and mark out points and create subclips The Cue view is used to add cue points within a clip After adding cue points you can use the cue list to start playback from any cue point in the list Working with clips that are still recording The following restrictions apply when working with a clip in the Player that is currently recording e You cannot rename the clip e The clip mark in mark out points cannot be modified e Subclips created from a clip currently being recorded can only have a Mark Out equal to the last frame that has been recorded when the subclip is created You cannot create a clip longer than has been recorded under the assumption that the unrecorded frames will fill it in Otherwise clips that are currently being recorded behave normally As a reminder Read Only is displayed in the StatusBar when the clip loaded or playing is still being recorded Monitoring the play channel The Monitor pane displays status information for the loaded clip The information that is displayed can be customized using the Configuration application Channel information that can be displayed for a channel include the loaded clip name transport status e g Play or Stop play s
124. ark out point Using the timecode entry controls 1 In Play view select the mark in or mark out timecode contro 90 01 11 09 to open the timecode entry dialog box Mark Out x Clear Back 174 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Editing a clip Clearing mark in mark out 2 Enter a timecode value using the onscreen keypad or an external keyboard then select OK or Enter Alternatively Use the current position scrub bar lluwl in the timecode entry dialog box to locate the desired frame then select OK C Scrub Bar Click and drag while monitoring channel output Using the clip length control Entering a new clip length moves the mark out point 1 Select the Length timecode entry control 2 Enter a new clip length The clip length changes by moving the mark out point Editing a clip Clearing mark in mark out Clearing a mark point resets the mark to it s default position mark in is set to the beginning of available media mark out is set to the last frame of available media To clear a mark point do one of the following e In Play view select and hold the In or Out button then choose Clear Mark in the pop up menu e In Play view select the mark in or the mark out timecode control and select Clear then OK to clear the mark Mark Out x Clear Clear Select Clear then OK to clear the mark 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 175 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Changing the
125. ased video and audio from a digital recording device The iVDR record channel transport controls can be used to control the remote device Port Assignments Any of the ports 1 3 can be used for making a connection to a IEEE 1394 device The 1VDR supports one IEEE 1394A input Video Requirements NTSC 25 Mb s 4 1 1 720 X 480 29 97Hz Frame Rate PAL 25 Mb s 4 2 0 720 X 576 25Hz Frame Rate Audio Channels 2 channels 16 bit 48KHz Timecode Device timecode input is not recorded Instead the clip timecode is striped using the 1VDR record channel internal timecode generator Start timecode is automatically set to 00 00 00 00 Monitoring Video 1394 video input can be monitored using the record channel monitor in the Monitor pane E to Eis not supported Audio 1394 audio must be monitored on the IEEE 1394 device itself Timecode 1394 timecode input is displayed in the record channel timecode display and the record channel monitor in the Monitor pane Compatible Devices Refer to the M Series iVDR Release Notes 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 305 Appendix A Specifications Operational specifications Topics include e Video codec description on page 306 e Vertical blanking interval compression on page 306 e Media file system performance on page 307 e Video network performance on page 307 e AVI file encoding requirements for importing on page 307
126. ationary section is Intermediate designated by the RH and the LH marked on the rails 310 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Mounting the Rack Slides Mounting the Rack Slides Choose the proper set of rail mounting holes on the rack Notice that the hole spacing can vary with the rack type When mounting the slides in racks with EIA spacing make sure that the slides are attached to the 0 5 inch spaced holes MIL STD 189 UNIVERSAL SPACING SE 1 250 in O 1 250 in o aon 0 500 in BS A A i 0 625 in 1 250 in Lap O Front and rear rack rail mounting hardware is provided with the rack mount kit Mount the rails using the enclosed hardware Make sure the stationary sections are horizontally aligned and are level as well as parallel to each other 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 311 Appendix B Rack mounting and Connector Pin outs BAR NUT Use ifthe frontrail is nottapped FRONT RACK RAIL BAR NUT S T ee e 88e eog N ANNY REAR RACK RAIL 312 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Installing the iVDR on the rack mount rails Installing the iVDR on the rack mount rails To install the 1iVDR on the rack mount rails 1 Pull the slide out track section to the fully extended position WARNING To prevent injury two people are required to lift the iVDR A It is too heavy for one person to install in the rack AN WARNING To prevent serious injury insure that the r
127. audio track You can choose to show or hide the audio meters using Configuration Manager See Configuring the Monitor pane display on page 124 Channel Info In split screen view a brief description of the channel status is always 14 20 56 27 displayed underneath the Video Monitor ell This information includes The asset name If no asset loaded lt no clip loaded gt is displayed Current timecode Next clip name Only available in Playlist Countdown timecode Only available in Playlist In full screen views the same information can be displayed below or on top of the video monitor area at the lower left corner You can choose to show or hide channel information using Configuration Manager See Configuring the Monitor pane display on page 124 Control Application In split screen view you can launch other control applications for a Drop down List Recorder Remote AMP Remote VDCP channel The current application will be stopped and closed The new application is launched afterwards See Selecting the channel control application on page 136 Channel Monitor R1 Recorder 14 30 05 26 lt no clip loaded gt Recorder Displays the active video of the active channel The monitors of all other channels display the thumbnail image of the asset loaded M Series User Manual 133 Chapter 5 Using the Monitor Pane Viewing the Monitor pane in full screen mode
128. audio pair to monitor then select OK to save changes 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 151 Chapter 6 Recording Clips 152 Changing the timecode source The record channel always records one track of timecode using one of three timecode sources VITC LTC or INT internal timecode generator Once selected the timecode source is displayed in the Recorder toolbar as the current timecode If no timecode is present at the selected timecode source XX XX XX XX is displayed as the current timecode Also clips recorded without timecode will show no mark in mark out timecode after recording When LTC is detected but the signal is intermittent the last valid timecode is displayed anytime the LTC signal disappears Clips with missing or intermittent timecode will show this behavior during playback in a play channel Timecode Timecode Menu Display Source Button R1 16 27 13 29 aa Clip Clip_1 New Clip Location Jocal default Preview 7 h l In Out Length Properties 00 00 00 00 16 27 14 01 00 00 12 18 00 29 30 24 v ail A 4 Recorder 1 Clip _1 recording To change the timecode source 1 In the Recorder pane do one of the following e Select the menu button then choose Options OF e Select the timecode display PAA EP The Options dialog box appears M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 Options Changing the timecode source Select a timecode source for record
129. available for warranty and contract customers United States Latin America Eastern Europe Southern Europe Middle East Australia Belgium Brazil Canada China Denmark Dubai Finland 800 547 8949 Toll Free 800 547 8949 Toll Free 49 6155 870 606 33 1 34 20 77 77 33 1 34 20 77 77 61 3 9721 3737 32 2 3349031 55 11 5509 3440 800 547 8949 Toll Free 86 106615 9450 45 45968800 971 4 299 64 40 35 9 68284600 Authorized Support Representative France Germany Greece Hong Kong Italy Netherlands Poland Russia Singapore Spain Sweden Switzerland UK 33 1 34 20 77 77 49 6155 870 606 33 1 34 20 77 77 852 2531 3058 39 06 8720351 31 35 6238421 49 6155 870 606 49 6155 870 606 656379 1390 34 91512 03 50 46 87680705 41 1 487 80 02 44 870 903 2022 A local authorized support representative may be available in your country To locate the support representative for your country visit the product support Web page on the Grass Valley Web site M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Safety Summaries General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using this product you may need to access other parts of the system Read the General Safety summary in other system manuals for warnings and caution
130. ave and apply all changes at once Generating VITC You can specify the lines on which VITC timecode is generated as follows 1 Select System and choose Configuration select Channel select the P1 or P2 tab and open the Video Output link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link 2 Locate the question What lines should be used when generating VITC timecode 116 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Configuration for iVDR 1 RI PA Re Ape Enable VITC generator What lines should be used when generating ITC timecode 16 Default Test mode Colorbars output Use the scroll button if necessary to locate the question 3 Enable the VITC generator factory default values Adjusting video output Cancel 4 Select the lines for VITC timecode or select Default to return the settings to their Changes to VITC generator settings take effect immediately without closing the Configuration dialog box 5 Select OK to close and save changes Displaying colorbars 20 April 2005 1 Make sure the channel is not already in use You can temporarily display 75 colorbar signal as a test as follows 2 Select System and choose Configuration select Channel select the P1 or P2 tab and open the Video Output link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link 3 Locate the Test Mode setting M Series User Manual 117 Chapter 4
131. ayer on page 173 Location default Countdown Timecode 00 00 03 42 Displays the time remaining in the clip To select the countdown mode you want to monitor open the Options dialog box by selecting Options in the context menu Play Mode Context Menu Options Properties Go To Subclip Stripe Timecode Load Locate Help Auto Subclips v EtoE Options Opens the Play channel options dialog box Properties Opens the Properties dialog for the currently loaded clip See Viewing clip properties on page 173 Goto Used to jump to a specific timecode Select Goto to open the Goto dialog then enter a timecode value or use the scrub bar to go to the desired position See Jumping to a specific timecode on page 168 Subclip Opens the Subclip mode which allows you to create subclips from the currently loaded clip A subclip is an entirely new clip that references media in another clip See Creating Subclips on page 179 Stripe Timecode Opens the Stripe Timecode dialog which allows you to replace the existing timecode track for the loaded clip You can replace with time of day or a specific start timecode See Striping timecode replacing the timecode track on page 177 Load Select to open the Load Clip dialog which displays the contents of the current bin Select a clip then choose OK to load See Loading a clip from Player on page 16
132. b See Viewing detailed transfer job properties on page 270 M Series User Manual 267 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Receiving Page The Receiving page displays all import transfer jobs Properties WOR Y fdefaultclip_1 0 9MB s 5 Remove sending WDR Y fdefaultclip_2 0 9ME s 12 Completed Sending Page The Sending page displays all Send to transfer jobs and their status aL Properties Source Vi default Clip_1 oa Desti CyTempsclip_i get d Status 10 1MB s 40 Remove 3 Clip_2 ee Source Y default clip_2 eS Dest C Tempiclip_2 gst SAA Status 10 1MB s 20 Completed Completed Page The Completed page displays all jobs that have completed successfully Completed jobs are automatically cleared after approximately 36 hours You can manually clear jobs from the completed list using Remove or Remove All 268 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Transfer Monitor TERE cip Pin D Source Receiving ag Dest Status Sending T lip_i4 Stns Source eam Dest Teea Stats Clip_13 Source Dest Status Viewing transfer jobs in Transfer Monitor Properties Vi fdefaultclip_ CyTemp clip_2 qxt Done Remove Vi fdefaultClip_14 C Temp clip_3 gxt RemoveAll Done Y fdefaultClip_13 CyTempsclip_1 1 gst Done Viewing transfer jobs in Transfer Monitor 20 April 2005 Each transfer job is displayed in the Transfer Monitor with a thumbnail image along w
133. be defined for channels and inserted in playlists to control external equipment as the list is played See Configuring GPI inputs outputs on page 121 Serial Control Protocols over RS 422 The iVDR can be controlled by devices and applications software developed for the M Series 1VDR that use serial control protocols over the RS 422 serial port See About remote control protocol support on page 278 Remote Control Protocols over Ethernet The 1VDR can be controlled by devices and applications software developed for the 1VDR that use serial control protocols over the Ethernet network See About remote control protocol support on page 278 M Series User Manual 71 Chapter 3 Product Description AppCenter user interface overview Channel Select Tab Toolbar r R1 Recorder P1 Player R2 Recorder P2 Player E Tools Pane lal Displays Monitor and erie 14 19 37 10 14 20 56 227 Monitor or Clip_1 Clip_2 Clip_5 Clip_11 Clips pane Clips pane select buttons Recorder R1 Player Recorder Player Clip Clip_1 a f Location Y default 14 00 00 00 14 45 00 04 00 45 00 04 Application view select Some applications have multiple views New Clip Applications Pane Displays the control application for the selected channel Preview In Out 00 29 30 24 v aA1 A2 4 4 4 gt b Edit menu button Includes undo c
134. been specifically set for use as a real time device The M Series iVDR is configured for automatic logon allowing unattended booting To avoid partial or total system failure do not modify any operating system settings unless approved by Grass Valley including but not limited to the following Do not use the User Manager Do not use the Disk Administrator Do not load any third party software Do not install any Windows updates other than critical updates without contacting Grass Valley Product Support 3 In the Windows taskbar select Start Settings Network and Dial up Connections and continue with standard Windows procedures to set up the static IP address for the M Series iVDR 100BaseT adapter After setting the iVDR static IP address proceed to the next procedure Set up 1VDR hosts files Set up iVDR hosts files 20 April 2005 Name resolution for the 100BaseT adapter cannot be set to DNS or WINS You must set up a hosts file located in c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts on eachiVDR If you include the names and addresses of all the iVDRs on the network then you can copy the same file onto all these machines instead of editing the hosts file on each machine On each iVDR set up the hosts files as follows 1 Open the following file using Notepad or some other text editor c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts 2 Enter text in a single line for each machine including the local machine Entering th
135. ca aehencceieedo nts eee oe ho lee Goan teen 114 Adjusting video output TIMING ccceeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeesaeeaeeeeeeesaeaeeeseeeeeas 118 Configuring SDI output embedded audio n 00nnnnnnnnnenonneennnnnnnnnnnrnnsennnnnnenennene 120 Configuring GPI INPS OUIPUIS wiiee a ar E A 121 C onngurnngiGPINNPU S eati a a aa a a eer 121 Gontiguring GPLOUMPUIS se a a ee oe hao 122 Configuring the Monitor pane display 00000nnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnnnnennsennnrnnnnnnnsnnnsnnnennn 124 FontranelsetihgS ereraa a a 126 Adjusting the jog shuttle knob ranges ccccccseeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeessaaeeeeeeeeas 126 Enabling rear panel audio monitor volume control cseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 127 Setting start record button SEQUENCE ccccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesessaeaeeeseeeeees 127 Selecting full screen monitor Mode cccccccceeeceeecaaeeeeeceeeeeeeeessasaeaeeeeeeeeeess 128 Adding and removing network host NAMES ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaaaeeeees 130 4 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Chapter 5 Using the Monitor Pane Monitor pane Overview cceccccesececceeeceeccceueceecceuseeescaeeeeecsaueeeesaaeeeeesneaeeesssaneeessaaes 132 Viewing the Monitor pane in full screen MOode ssseesnnnnnsennnsrnsesrrnrrrenrnrrnresrrrnnnnee 134 Selecting the default full screen view cccceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 135
136. cal blanking area are compressed along with the picture This will includes the closed captioning information transmitted in the vertical blanking interval DV50 compression mode compresses additional VBI lines adjacent to the active picture 7 5 lines in 525 9 lines in 625 This includes the closed captioning Line 21 data services and XDS information transmitted in the vertical blanking interval 306 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Media file system performance Media file system performance e Maximum number of clips 20 000 e Minimum record to play time 5 second from start of record Video network performance The 1VDR supports streaming video network transfers between 1VDRs Profile XP Media Platforms or any device that supports General Exchange Format GXF as described in SMPTE 360M e Ethernet streaming and Ethernet control on the same network adapter interface is allowed Can handle four concurrent transfers with all four video channels operating at full bandwidth Additional transfers are queued Priority is given to record playback during system bandwidth negotiations AVI file encoding requirements for importing Before importing an AVI file make sure it meets the following encode requirements AVI file encoding requirements Video Compression DV SMPTE 314 25Mb s Encoder type type 1 interleaved or type 2 non interleaved Color sampling 4 1 1 525 Line NTSC 4 2 0 625 Line PAL Res
137. can play a clip that is still recording on one of the record channels Each channel handles one video track two audio tracks and one timecode track PB EE Switch Path R1 P1 Input Output Circuit Circuit R1 P1 Record Play Channel 1 Channel 1 R2 P2 Record Play Channel 2 Channel 2 R2 P2 Input Output Circuit Circuit PB EE Switch Path Note that an E to E path is provided for monitoring purposes When E to E mode is enabled the play channel video and audio outputs are switched to the corresponding record channel inputs when the play channel is in stop mode or when no clip is loaded The following table describes play channel operation depending the E to E selection E to E Setting Play channel mode Play channel output Disabled Play FF Rewind Show clip Stop Show clip Eject Show black Enabled Play FF Rewind Show clip Stop Show input Eject Show input Output is black if no video input is connected 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 65 Chapter 3 Product Description E to E considerations If E to E mode is enabled you can connect an external reference signal which is synchronous to the video input This will eliminate artifacts on the play channel output periodic vertical shift due to routing an asynchronous signal through the 1VDR However this is not required for recording the 1V DR can record asynchronous signals NOTE E to E ts provided for monitori
138. ce 50 ohm Minimum Input Voltage 0 1 V peak to peak differential Maximum Input Voltage 2 5 V peak to peak differential Nominal Output Voltage 2 0 V peak to peak differential LTC Reader LTC reader will accept LTC at rates between 1 30 and 80 times the nominal rate in either forward or reverse directions LTC Transmitter LTC transmitter outputs LTC at the nominal frame rate for the selected standard at 1x speed forward direction only VITC Input Output Parameter Specification VITC lines 10 22 525 Line lines 6 23 625 Line RS 422 specification The RS 422 interface conforms to ANSI SMPTE 207M 1997 standard SMPTE 422 304 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 GPI I O specifications GPI I O specifications Characteristics Description Number of Inputs Outputs 12 inputs and 12 outputs Connector type 25pin D GPI Input Inputs set to TTL level high Compatible with 5 volts CMOS TTL open collector or contact closures GPI Output Outputs are open drain drivers Max voltage when outputs are open 45V Max current when outputs are closed 250ma Typical risetimes approximately 625ns Typical falltimes approximately 400ns IEEE 1394A interface specification The following table describes the input requirements for the optional IEEE 1394A interface Characteristics Description Standard IEEE 1394A for import of DV b
139. ceauseeeseeseeeeseneeeeessags 274 Viewing volume properties csceecccceeseecceesseeeccsececeeeeeeecesseeesseseeeesaneesessass 275 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols About remote control protocol SUPPONI sssrini aa aia 2 8 About Local Remote MOdG cccccccccccssseccceeeseeecseceeeceeaeeeeeeseeaaeceeeesesaaeeesenenas 278 ADOULAMP OFGlOCOl SUD DO Mist cece bie wei aa a eta chee deeded 278 AbOuUtN DE P protocol SUD DON sesen ese tart ade eiedub green S 279 ADOULBVVV protocol SUD DOR naa eh ae arte tik a ee eat el 279 About video network transfer SUDPOSMt cccccseeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeas 279 About Front Panel remote indicator lights ccccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeas 280 Making RS 422 and Ethernet CONNECTIONS cceccceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeessaaeeeseeeeeas 280 Starting a remote control protocol application ccccceeeeeeeeeeseesseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeenees 281 Selecting the control port and Control MOE cceccccecceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeaaeees 282 Guide to Protocol Recorder Protocol Only mode cccccccseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeaees 283 Guide to Protocol Recorder Local Protocol mode cccccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeentnteees 285 Guide to Protocol Player Protocol Only MOdE ccccessecccceseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 288 Guide to Protocol Player Local Protocol mode cccccccecesseeceeeeseesesseeeees
140. chine 20 April 2005 The iVDR supports streaming media transfers over the standard Ethernet adapter or optional network adapters Streaming transfers allow playout while the asset is still transferring Destination devices for streaming include other M Series 1VDRs the Grass Valley Profile XP Media Platform or any device that supports SMPTE 360M streaming transfers Lists or programs streamed to the Profile XP platform are converted to a master in the Profile XP media file system You must configure an iVDR network adapter prior to using the Send to stream feature Refer to Setting up the Ethernet network on page 37 then return to this procedure 1 In the Clips pane select the asset s you want to transfer 2 Open the Send to dialog box using one of the following steps e Select the context menu button then choose Send to or e Select Send to in the asset context menu The Send to dialog box appears send V default Clip_1 x Destination Stream to iVDR 2iV 03 18 03 11 22 AM 03 21 03 08 39 AM Bin Name Short Clips Cancel 3 Select Stream then locate and select the stream destination About browsing Non M Series Devices Browsing a non M Series device such as a Profile XP Media Platform is not supported You must select the device and then manually enter the disk volume and bin name e g EXT default and the file name to stream to Note that the path is case sensitive Browsin
141. clip from the Clips pane on page 165 e Loading a clip from Player on page 166 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 169 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Using Cue points for playback Player s Cue View allows you to add cue points to a clip You can use cue points to manage clip play out and create subclips The following sections describe how to work with cue points Topics included here About using cue points on page 170 Viewing the cue list on page 171 Adding a cue point on page 171 Removing a cue point on page 171 Jump to the selected cue point on page 171 Jump to the next cue point on page 172 Renaming a cue point on page 172 About using cue points When you select Cue View a chronological list of cue points is displayed The list begins with the mark in point and ends with the mark out point You can add additional cue points to mark other frames within the clip You can add cue points while the clip is playing or in stop mode When you add a cue point it is listed by a default name such as cue_1 and timecode value Cue points cannot be moved however you can remove a cue point and use the transport controls or Goto Timecode dialog box to enter a new cue point at the current position Cue points can be used to Manage clip playout jump to the selected cue or next cue Create subclips You can create a subclip from the selected cue point The selected
142. clip thumbnail image The clip thumbnail is displayed in control applications and in the Clips pain for visual identification of the clip By default the 16th frame is used to generate the thumbnail image To change the clip thumbnail 1 While monitoring the play channel output use the front panel or onscreen transport controls to position the clip to the desired video frame 2 In Player select the thumbnail then choose Yes in the Change Thumbnail dialog box Change Thumbnail x ey Would you like to set this clip s we thumbnail to the current position NOTE If clip marks are edited so that the video frame used to generate the thumbnail is outside the new clip marks the thumbnail is reset to a position near the mark in of the modified clip To reset the thumbnail e Select the thumbnail image then choose Reset in the pop up menu This resets the clip thumbnail to the 16th frame in the clip Adjusting playback audio level To adjust the playback audio level 1 In the Player pane select the Meterbar button 4 2 Adjust the audio level in one of the following ways e Adjust the graphical faders individually or ganged which insures both channels use the same gain e Select Unity to set audio back to the last saved level 00 29 39 07 Gang Unity Save v a1 a2 4 3 Click Save to save changes to the clip audio level 176 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Selecting t
143. clip will cue to the next cue point in the clip 1 In Cue view do one of the following e Select the Next Cue button or e Select the Goto button then select Next Cue 2 Press the Play button on the front panel or use the onscreen transport controls Play out starts from the cued frame Renaming a Cue point 1 Select the cue point in the cue point list 2 Select the menu button then choose Rename Cue 3 Use the text entry dialog or external keyboard to enter a new cue name then press Ok or Enter 172 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Viewing clip properties Viewing clip properties To view the properties of a clip loaded in Player In Play view do one of the following e Select the Properties button OF e Select the menu button then choose Properties NOTE To learn more about the Clip Properties dialog box refer to Viewing clip properties on page 272 Clip_17 Properties E Mame dip 17 Type Clip Location bocalfINT Bins Tracks Format Compression Size Length Created Last Modified Locked 1 Video 2 Audio 1 Timecode NTSC DropFrame MPEG 412 MBytes 00 02 10 12 04 03 02 04 27 PM 04 0 02 12 47 PM Cancel Renaming a clip in Player 1 In the Play view select the clip name control Clip Clip_1 20 April 2005 2 Enter the new clip name using the onscreen keyboard or an external keyboard 3 Select OK or press Enter M Series
144. controls channel resources e Preview clip The VDCP preview preset id is considered the preview clip Generally the preview clip begins playing after the current clip completes at which point the preview clip becomes the current clip About BVW protocol support You can use BVW protocol to control 1VDR record and play channels BV W protocol is Supported using the BV W Player application running on aniVDR play channel and BVW Recorder application running on aniVDR record channel The 1VDR applications support the standard set of BVW commands used for VTR machine control BVW Insert Edit used by some edit control panels 1s not supported See Starting a remote control protocol application on page 281 About video network transfer support If you use remote protocols to perform video network transfers you must setup the video network and the Controller ID as described in the Installation chapter Refer to Setting up the Ethernet network on page 37 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 279 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols About Front Panel remote indicator lights The remote control indicator lights on the Front Panel next to the channel select buttons glow whenever a protocol application has been launched and is running on that channel Ov grass valley Channel Select Buttons Remote Indicator i a 7 chu Lent 1400 00000 280009
145. controls and indicators used in the Local and Protocol control mode Assignable Current Timecode Clip Name amp Context Buttons Timecode Source Current Bin Menu Default buttons Use Context are shown R2 12 17 34 15 ah Clip Clip_4 Location vi newesclips menu to modify New Clip Options In 12 17 26 122 12 17 33 00 00 05 09 a 02 44 22 ie nd Thumbnail Time Dome Length Protocol Meter Bar Current and Button Monitor Button Preview clips Click to specify Button Click to adjust clip length audio Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignments to best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one second opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Button choices include New Clip Options Locate and Properties The buttons function the same as the context menu Locate items See Local Protocol Mode Context Menu later in this table New Clip Options Propertie rties Current Timecode Indicates the current timecode of the timecode source for recording TIRER The timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed if there is no input _ timecode Timecode Source The text displayed to the right of current timecode indicates the iTe timecode source VITC LTC or INT internal generator See Changing the timecode source on p
146. cting 105 DVD drive formatting the disk 93 reading the disk in other computers 95 sending files to 262 E E to E mode in Player 161 164 181 editing aclip 162 174 electric shock avoiding 15 embedded audio disabling on SDI output 120 monitoring play channel audio 151 177 selecting audio group on SDI input 112 selecting audio group on SDI output 120 emission limits certifications 17 erasing unused media 239 See also deleting assets 239 configuration loading defaults 101 saving and restoring 100 Configuration Manager opening 99 connector pin outs 318 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Ethernet See network event audio level adjusting 209 clearing marks 207 locating source clip 211 moving marks 205 new event creating 192 pausing at end 208 properties viewing 210 renaming 211 thumbnail changing 209 exporting log files 91 92 Exporting media GXF AVI 262 external keyboard connecting 26 F fire hazard avoiding 15 FireWire connecting 148 importing from 148 selecting 148 front panel brightness adjustment 86 illustration 68 Jog Shuttle knob 84 126 record button sequence 127 remote control indicators 280 selection knob 84 tilting 85 touch screen calibrating 85 touch screen cleaning 85 transport controls 84 transport controls using 84 GPI connector pinout 316 electrical specification 305 input triggers configuring 121 output triggers adding to a list 200 configuring 122 grounding safety
147. ction GPI properties page Section 1 Properties i Section 1 roosts Ss AA ESS ee eMC General Location Vi fdefaultList_1 Trigger GPI GPI Out 2 Start of section All Events End of section then choose the Properties I 200 Start plus 00 00 00 00 End minus 00 00 00 00 Cancel M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Using GPI output triggers in playlists Event GPI properties page Chip_ 1 Properties Clip_i General Location Vi fdefaultList_1 Section 1 Trigger GPI GPI Out 1 Start of event End of event Start plus 00 00 00 00 End minus 00 00 00 00 Cancel 3 Select Trigger GPI then use the drop down list to select a GPI output NOTE If no GPI outputs are listed use Configuration Manager to assign GPI outputs to the current channel then return to this step See Configuring GPI outputs on page 122 4 Select the trigger action for the GPI output Action Trigger point Start of event or section First frame of event or section End of event or section Last frame of event or section Start of event or section plus Start of event or section plus the time entered using the text entry control Offset should not exceed the event or section total length End of event or section minus End of event or section minus the time entered using the text entry control Offset should not exceed the event or section total length I
148. d Split Screen and Full Screen Buttons Toggles the active pane between full and split screen views Split screen displays the Tools and Applications pane allowing interaction between panes such as drag and drop Selecting full screen displays the active pane in full screen allowing the application to display more information The transport controls still effect the control application even though it is hidden in full screen mode M Series User Manual 73 Chapter 3 Product Description 74 Standard channel applications included in AppCenter AppCenter includes standard channel control applications for performing essential tasks When AppCenter starts a control application is started for each channel See Selecting the channel application on page 78 Standard User Interface Channel Essentials Tasks Application Type Name Required Recorder TEZER Recorder Recording clips Clip Clip_ol 78 Location docal V dfauit a Out Length See 0000 0000 16 27 14 01 00 00 12 180 v A Oaz a Player Control View Player Play clips edit and trim clips lt 00 00 03 23 create sub clips and playout me clip Clip a using cue points er Location MANGO INT chafaut _ P ns Out Lengi PAOA S ee nEn 0a l v a1 gm 4 Cue View 12 57 34 03 12 57 34 00 Mark In 12 57 45 00 cuci A 12 58 13 10 cue_s v 12 58 33 29 Mark Oul v a1 OA2 4 Protocol 174 29 59
149. d audio output if needed See Configuring SDI output embedded audio on page 120 Select timecode source The timecode source for each record channel is selected in the Recorder application running on the channel Refer to Changing the timecode source on page 152 Verifying basic operation Record and play a short clip to confirm that your connections and system setup are correct Refer to the Chapter 2 Quick Start Procedures for record and play procedures 36 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Setting up the Ethernet network Setting up the Ethernet network Refer to the following list of procedures then perform the ones required to set up the Ethernet network for your application Connecting the Ethernet network cabling Shows how to connect the 1VDR to an Ethernet network using the standard 100BaseT port or the optional 1GBaseT port 100BaseT Configuration Data and streaming between 1VDRs Contains instructions for configuring the 100BaseT network connection to provide standard data network capability and for streaming media transfers between iVDRs 1GBaseT Configuration Data and streaming between 1VDRs Contains instructions for configuring the 1GBaseT network connection to provide standard data network capability and for streaming media transfers between iVDRs Operating with both 1OOBT and 1GBT network connections Describes how to set up both networks so that you can use the low spe
150. d is supported through the AMP Player application running an iVDR play channel and the AMP Recorder running on an iVDR record channel External control devices can be connected via rear panel RS 422 serial connectors or an Ethernet network connection See Starting a remote control protocol application on page 281 278 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 About VDCP protocol support AMP Player supports the use of a two head model in that two clips are loaded simultaneously as follows e Current clip The AMP preset id is considered the current clip that controls channel resources e Preview clip The AMP preview preset id is considered the preview clip Generally the preview clip begins playing after the current clip completes at which point the preview clip becomes the current clip About VDCP protocol support You can use the Video Disk Control Protocol VDCP to control 1VDR record and play channels on the 1VDR This protocol is supported through the VDCP Player application running on aniVDR play channel and VDCP Recorder application running on aniVDR record channel External control devices can be connected via rear panel RS 422 serial port connectors See Starting a remote control protocol application on page 281 VDCP Player supports the use of a two head model in that two clips are loaded simultaneously as follows e Current clip The VDCP preset id is considered the current clip that
151. d opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative oad l button choices Button choices include Options or Properties The ii buttons function the same as the context menu items See Protocol Gens control only Context Menu later in this table Current Timecode Indicates the current timecode of the timecode of the clip The TIRER timecode value of XX XX XX XX is displayed when there is no recorded timecode See Striping timecode replacing the timecode track on page 177 288 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Guide to Protocol Player Protocol Only mode Control Description and User Operation EE or Playback Selection The text displayed to the right of clip timecode indicates the playback gt mode selection EE or PB When E to E is selected the play channel output switches to the record channel input when playback is stopped When PB is selected play channel output freezes on the last video frame To select the playback mode refer Selecting E to E mode on page 182 Clip name and current bin Displays the clip s name and location in the video storage file Clip Clip_2 system In Status view you cannot rename the clip Location vs fdetault Countdown timecode Displays the time remaining for the clip loaded in player 00 07 06 7 7 Protocol Only Mode Options Opens the Options dialog box used to select the control Context Menu mode and the control port See
152. der P1 Player O R2 Recorder O P2 Player x System Lookin default Tools Load cli Monitor Properti z me a i Search E TER iY Clip_2 1 Clip_3 Context Assignable Asset List Button Buttons Image view shown here Click and hold Text or Details views are to assign also available Control Description and User Operation Q Current Bin Label Lookin default Displays the name and location of the current bin or the summary of the search or link operation At first time start up the current bin is V default The bin named default is on the internal disk volume Touch or click the current bin label to change the current bin and organize bins See About the Current Bin drop down list on page 223 Context Menu Button Opens the Clips Pane context menu See See About the Clips pane context menu on page 224 220 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Viewing the Clips pane Control Description and User Operation Context Button Look in Load The operation and label of the context button changes with the control application displayed in the applications pane Load Displayed when Player or Recorder is running on the active channel Loads the asset selected in the asset list Preview Displayed when Playlist is running on the active channel in Event View Creates an unattached event in the playlist that can be previ
153. dialog box NOTE To monitor audio use the audio monitoring features on the DV device Monitor IEEE1394 Device timecode is not recorded video and timecode Clip timecode is striped Start inputs timecode is automatically set to 00 00 00 00 R1 Recorder P1 Player R2 Recorder P2 Player 00 04 30 27 00 04 22 16 12 35 36 05 OC DOCH DVCapture_1 DYCapture_J lt no clip loaded gt lt no clip loaded gt Recorder p Recorder Player R1 New Clip Preview Length Goto c 00 00 00 00 00 00 08 11 00 00 08 11 08 18 34 28 IUEEE 1394 device Recorder 1 DYCapture_1 importing from device 6 After positioning the cue point on the DV device use one of the following methods to start recording a clip e New Clip See To record a clip using New Clip on page 142 e Crash Record See To record a clip using crash record on page 143 e Fixed Length See To record a clip using fixed length on page 143 NOTE When you start the recording the iVDR pre rolls the 1394 device several seconds then starts play back prior to capturing media This ensures the video frame cued in the channel monitor is recorded Pre roll does not occur if record is started while the 1394 device is already playing M Series User Manual Chapter 6 Recording Clips 7 Load and play the new clip in Player using one of the following steps e In the Recorder pane select the Preview button or e Inthe Monitor
154. dialog box for this and all other assets 20 April 2005 Clearing metadata Clip_1 Add Data Type Clip A Location Vi fdefault General Clear Media Creator Operator_1 Date 05 28 03 Modify Cancel Clearing metadata Clearing metadata removes the value entered for the selected metadata but does not delete the metadata name from the properties data page 1 Select the asset in the Clips pane asset list 2 Open the Properties dialog box using one of the following e Select the Clips pane context menu button v then choose Properties or e Select Properties in the asset context menu or e Select the Properties button in the Clips pane If the Properties button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 The properties dialog box appears 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 255 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane 256 Clip_ 1 Properties x j Mame Clip_1 Add Data Type Clip B Location i fdefault General Clear Media Creator Operator_1 Date 05 28 03 Modify Cancel want to clear Select Clear The metadata value is now blank Repeat step 3 and step 4 to clear other metadata values In the Properties dialog box select OK Select Data then use the scroll button to locate and select the metadata entry you If the metadata name is used by any other asset that is a value has been en
155. ding metadata and setting attributes that will occur during playback Insert Event Inserts the loaded event in the list The event is inserted after the last selected event This menu item only appears when the event is not in the play list for instance after selecting New Event Locate Locates the event s source clip in the Clips pane See Locating the source clip on page 211 Goto Select Goto to open the Goto dialog then enter a timecode value or use the scrub bar i I to go to the desired position in the event Help opens online help for Playlist Insert and Accept Buttons Insert Button Displayed when editing a new event that is not yet in the list Inserts the current event into the list after the currently selected event Accept Button Displayed when editing an event in a list Propagates changes you made to the event properties to the event in the list for example event marks thumbnail or end properties Goto Button Opens the Goto dialog box which allows you to jump to a specific timecode in the event Time Dome 2 00 00 03 23 Displays a graphical representation of the current position between the event s marks with an empty Time Dome representing the current position at event in and a full dome representing the current position at event out The time remaining from the current position is displayed beneath the Time Dome When playing media that is currently bei
156. down list e In the Clips pane touch or click the Current Bin label then choose a bin from the list R1 Recorder P1 Player gt R2 Recorder P2 Player Lookin default d Organize Bins Load default Properti mybin Search Recycle Bin Changing current bin Exploring a bin in the Organize Bins dialog box causes it to become the current bin 1 In the Clips pane select the Current Bin drop down list then select the Organize Bins Look in Organize Bins Load default Properti mybin Search Recycle Bin 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box select a bin then click Explore 230 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Creating a new bin C default Type Bin New Bin Items 12 s Explore Created 03 18 03 11 22 AM 3 Close the Organize Bins dialog box 4 The bin becomes the destination bin for recording and the source bin for loading clips for playing for all channel operations Creating a new bin 1 Open the Organize Bin dialog box using one of the following e Select the context menu button Cw then choose New Bin Or e In the Clips pane select the Current Bin drop down list then select the Organize Bins R1 Recorder P1 Player O R2 Recorder P2 Player Look in System Tools Eoad default Monitor Properti mybin Search Recycle Bin 2 In the Organize Bins dialog box select
157. dphone output with Front Panel Option ssssessssesesnnnsessernnreeseeennes 304 LETC IApUVOVIDU a E E medias cea eaneeectenatecacs 304 VITE TID UT QUO Ul rsa r E 304 AO 422 SPECINCA NOM ciiin an a a a a a a cee neia 304 GPIO SpECINCaNODS monea a E N 305 IEEE 1394A interface specification cccececceseeececeeseeeeceeeceeeceeaseeeseaseeeeensees 305 Operational SOCCHICATIONS szni a E 306 Video codec description a cssatceesanes teres eenteragd cunseeedt ode tacd ened eleuemaneend eee eed 306 Vertical blanking interval compression ccccsesseeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaes 306 Media file system performance scseecceccseceeeeeeeeeceeseceeeseaesaeeeeeeseeeeeesseseaas 307 Video network performance cccccsseececcesseceecesececceseececeuseeeeseeeeesseneeeeessaes 307 AVI file encoding requirements for importing ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 307 8 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Composite analog video input performance cccccccseeeeeeeeeaeesseeeeeesanaeeeeeeeeas 307 Appendix B MRack mounting and Connector Pin outs FLACK MOUNEIIG TGV DR seene ain ate a E N 309 Rack mount hardware shipped with the IVDR cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 310 Mounting the Rack Slides niaranra aeea a S aaa iadi EE 311 Installing the iVDR on the rack mount rallS cece cece cece eee e eee e eee eaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 313 Making Rack Slide Adjustments
158. dth Topics in this section e Importing media from a file on page 258 e Importing assets from another iVDR or Profile XP system on page 260 Importing media from a file You can import media files in either SMPTE 360M gxf or AVI DV avi type 1 or type 2 file format Importing converts the files to the 1VDR media file format Before importing an AVI file make sure the file meets the following encode requirements e Video Compression DV SMPTE 314 25Mb s e Encoder type type 1 interleaved or type 2 non interleaved e Color sampling 4 1 1 525 Line NTSC 4 2 0 625 Line PAL e Resolution 720 X480 525 or 720 X 576 625 e Frame Rate 29 97Hz 525 Line or 25Hz 625 Line e Audio Sampling 16bit PCM 48Khz sample rate stereo To import a file 1 In the Clips pane select the current bin For help see Changing current bin using Look in drop down list on page 230 The current bin is the destination bin for the import operation 258 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Importing media from a file 2 Select the Clips pane context menu button then choose Import The Import dialog box opens Import Source Look in C imported_Clips Steam series1 gxf 3 25 03 1 17 AM es1 gxf 3 20 03 10 03 PM es gxf 3 16 03 9 44 PM File Name en 1 gxf Destination Bin Name V default Cip Name Bil lt o o oo o Cancel 3 Select File NOTE
159. e Troubleshoot as needed Also refer to the M Series Service Manual for troubleshooting procedures 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 41 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR 1GBaseT Configuration Data and streaming between iVDRs After making 1GBaseT network connections as described in Connecting the Ethernet network cabling on page 37 use the following procedure to configure the network settings Once the 1GBaseT network configured you can perform the following tasks e General networking tasks such as file sharing or importing exporting from networked devices using standard media file formats AVI DV25 GXF e Remote control of the 1VDR using devices and applications software developed for the M Series 1VDR that use industry standard remote control protocols over Ethernet e Stream media transfers betweeniVDRs using the General Exchange Format GXF as described in SMPTE 360M GXF streaming transfers allow loading and playing a clip before the transfer is complete Setting up the 1GBaseT network for streaming transfer support has the following network requirements e No DHCP and WINS DNS etc Do not use automatic mechanisms for network settings Static IP addresses must be used on the iVDRs All name resolution must be through hosts files located on each networked device e The host name of all peer 1VDRs must be added to a host registry using the 1VDR Configuration tool Procedure summary e Set the stat
160. e use the Date tab By default the All Dates box is selected To specify date criteria select the Find items option to enable the controls under it Use the drop down list to choose Created or Modified then do one of the following e Select the between option and then specify a date range Click the edit control to display a calendar for easy input e Select the in the last option and then use the drop down lists to specify a time within a recent number of minutes hours days or months Look in V default Text Date Type h All dates Advanced Find items Created between 09 29 03 and 10 29 03 in the last 1 Days Search by Type In the Type tab select the type of assets clips programs or lists to be searched Search results will only include the selected types M Series User Manual 245 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Look in V default Find items of the following type Advanced v Clips Programs Lists 4 Once you have selected the search criteria select Ok to start the search The search results are displayed in the Asset List The text in the Current Bin control is replaced with a brief summary of the search For example Search movie indicates all the clips programs and lists with names like moviel movie2 or Search Created Last 5 Days for assets created in the last 5 days O R1 Recorder P1 Player R2 Recorder P2 Playe Clip_1 05 27
161. e Value String Like Not Like A string N A Integer Greater Than A number N A Float Less Than 4 Equals 4 O Between amp a Date Between Date 1 Date 2 Before Date After Date Boolean Is True False N A 5 Once you have added all the search criteria select Ok to start the search The search results are displayed in the Asset List The text in the Current Bin control is replaced with a brief summary of the search 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 249 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Finding linked assets The Links dialog box helps you locate assets that are related based on the links criteria that you can specify 1 In the asset list select the asset for which you want to find linked assets 2 Open the Links dialog box by performing one of the following steps e Select the Clips pane context menu button then choose Links or e Select an asset then select Links in the asset context menu or e Select the Links button in the Clips pane If the Links button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 Links to Clip_5 Find items with the following relationship Shared Media Source Clip Sub Clips References Same Bin Cancel 3 Choose one of the link relationship to us Link Relationship Description Shared media Find all assets that reference the same media files 1 e the same video audio
162. e context menu button then choose the Properties e Select the Properties button 3 Select End Clip_1 a General J Location Yi fdetault List_1 Section 1 GPI Pause Freeze on last frame Cancel 4 In the End page select the Pause option then use the drop down list to select a pause action 5 Use the drop down list to choose whether to Show black Show E to E Freeze on last frame or Freeze on next event 6 Click OK The pause symbol ee appears next to the event in List view Related topics e Adding pause at the end of all section events on page 214 e Removing pause at the end of all section events on page 215 208 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Changing the event thumbnail image Changing the event thumbnail image By default an event s thumbnail is set to the thumbnail of its source clip To change an event s thumbnail 1 Select the event in List View 2 Select the Event button in the toolbar to change to Event View 3 Monitor video output and use the front panel or onscreen transport controls to position the clip to the desired video frame 4 Select the thumbnail to image in Event pane to open the pop up menu then select Set Event Thumbnail The event will now be represented by the new thumbnail If the event is the first play event in the list then the list thumbnail is updated to refer to the new event thumbnail NOTE If the you modify the event marks so that t
163. e list currently loaded in Playlist Save As Program Saves the current list as a program The new Move Up program is listed in the Clips pane with other assets Programs can be played using the Player application or inserted in a list in Playlist See Saving a list as a program on page 218 Properties Opens the properties dialog box for the selected item list section or play event Properties dialog box includes pages for setting up list timecode adding metadata and setting list attributes that will occur when playback reaches the end of the list Options include repeat or pause See Viewing list properties on page 203 Section properties and event properties dialog boxes include options for setting the end behavior repeat or pause and GPI output properties Viewing play event properties on page 210 Remove Removes the selected item from the list See Modifying events in the list on page 205 Locate Locates the list or source clip for an event depending on the selection in the Clips Pane See Locating a list in the Clips pane on page 218 or Locating the source clip on page 211 Goto Opens the Goto pop up menu which allows you to jump to selection next event next section or a timecode that you specify See Playing a list on page 202 Move Up Moves the selected event up in the list See Moving events in the list on page 210 Move Down Moves the selected event down in the l
164. e name of the local machine allows you to copy and use the same file on all iVDRs The text format is simple First type the IP address then use the TAB key or Space bar to insert a few spaces Now type the host name of each iVDR for example iVDR 1 and iVDR 2 Example 192 168 99 11 iVDR 1 192 168 99 12 iVDR 2 192 168 99 13 iAVDR 3 NOTE By default the iVDR host name is the same as the Windows computer name To determine the iVDR computer name right click My Computer on the Windows desktop then properties Select the Network Identification tab and look for the Full computer name 3 Enter the host name of each Profile XP Media Platform followed by the characters _1e0 to specify network type as LOOBT Be sure to use the zero character not the letter o This is only required for the Profile XP systems Example host file for one Profile XP Media Platform and three i1VDRs on a 1OOBT M Series User Manual 49 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Ethernet network 192 168 99 11 iVDR 1 192 168 99 12 iVDR 2 192 168 99 13 iVDR 3 192 168 99 14 ProfilexP 1 Leo 4 Add the IP address and host name of any other device on the video network that supports the General Exchange Format GXF 5 Save the file and exit the text editor 6 Reboot the iVDR 7 Copy the new hosts file onto all the other 1VDRs and networked devices to save you editing it again NOTE It is not required to set up a host file on the Profile XP
165. e onscreen or external keyboard 4 Select OK Selecting the section end properties You can control how a list performs during playout by selecting the section end properties Section End properties determine what will happen when playout reaches the end of the section 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 213 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists To select section end properties 1 Select the section in the List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following oe SUE Cree po e Select the context menu button then choose the Properties e Select the Properties button 3 Select End to display the End Property Page Section 1 Properties d Section 1 e o I I I I I I I IIo General Location Vi fdefaultList_1 l Repeat Pause at end Freeze on last frame All Events Cancel 4 Select the end properties then click OK The following table describes the end properties available End Property Description Repeat When playout reaches the end of the section the play position jumps back to the first event in the section and play continues The section will continue to repeat until you intervene Pause When the play position reaches the end of the section playout pauses until you intervene You must select from the following pause actions EtoE Freeze on last frame Freeze on next event momentary freeze on the last frame of the current event th
166. e points 1 Select two cue points in the cue point list 2 Select the menu button then choose Create Clip To create a subclip using a selected cue point as mark in The subclip is terminated by the source clip mark out point 1 Select the cue point to use as the mark in for the new clip 2 Select the menu button then choose Create Clip To create a subclip for all cue points Each subclip is terminated using the mark out of the source clip e Select the menu button then choose Create All Clips In some cases a progress dialog is displayed as the clips are generated 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 181 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Selecting E to E mode When E to Eis selected the play channel video and audio outputs are switched to the corresponding record channel inputs when the play channel is in stop mode or when no clip is loaded The following table describes play channel operation depending the E to E selection E to E Setting Play channel mode Play channel output Disabled Play FF Rewind Show clip Stop Show clip Eject Show black Enabled Play FF Rewind Show clip Stop Show input Eject Show input Output is black if no video input is connected E to E considerations If E to E mode is enabled you can connect an external reference signal which is synchronous to the video input This will eliminate artifacts on the play channel output periodic vertical shift due to
167. e selected in the Configuration dialog box See Selecting video compression on page 105 A filled Time Dome represents no storage remaining Available storage is also displayed numerically under the timedome The white line functions as a sweep second hand to show record progress It sweeps through a complete revolution every 10 seconds when crash recording or makes a single revolution on a fixed length record 156 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Chapter Playing and Editing Information in this chapter includes 20 April 2005 Before using Player Starting Player Guide to using Player Play View Guide to using Player Cue View on page 163 Loading a clip from the Clips pane Loading a clip from Player Playing a clip Selecting loop play Locating a clip Jumping to a specific timecode Using the scrub bar in the Goto Dialog Using Cue points for playback Viewing clip properties Renaming a clip in Player Editing a clip Moving mark in mark out Editing a clip Clearing mark in mark out Changing the clip thumbnail image Adjusting playback audio level Selecting the audio monitor source Striping timecode replacing the timecode track Creating Subclips Selecting E to E mode M Series User Manual 157 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Before using Player The Player control
168. e steal 185 Monitoring the play channel cccceccccccsseccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeesaneeeeens 185 Symbols USE IMs PIAQVIISE css ei acae chal ataac E asa aceteneediencnseanes 186 SO RAVS eee eee eae ee ee ee ee oer ee ree me eet en 187 Guide to using Playlist List ViGW icenian a die estan ete 188 Guide to using Playlist Event VieW cccccccccccseecceeeeeessesseeeeseeeeeeeesesaeseseaaeeeseeees 192 Changing the event list viewing MOCE ccceecccceeeeeceaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeessaessaeaeeeeeeeeess 194 Seting Montor Normal N sesca e a A aE EEES 195 Creating alislar a a sede 196 OPENING ANceXISHING ISlar ee Mee ds ith hia he a 196 Renaming PANS sascetmanccueetscecte a E N 196 Inserting play evenness a a a e a e e eia 196 Selecting the iNSErtioN POINT scria a a E 196 Inserting play events in List VIQW cccccssecccecceeeeeeecseeeeeecseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeneeeeeseeaaees 197 Inserting play events in Event view cccccccceccsseeeeecseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaneeeesaaess 197 Using copy and paste to insert play events s sssesssnsernrseernerrrrnrrrrresrrrnsrrnneee 198 Inserting a clip that is still recording ccseseeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenseeeeeas 199 Inserting a playlist in a PlAYLISt ceceecececeeeeeeeseeeeeeecsaeeeeeseneneeeeseaeeeesanseeeeees 199 Using GP Loutp t triggers in playlists sses a iaaa at 200 Paving alis eat a a a aa a 202 Playlist keyboard SNOMCUIS d
169. each setting e Selecting the video input type on page 107 e Setting record channel NTSC pedestal on page 108 e Setting analog video automatic gain control on page 109 e Configuring the VITC reader on page 110 Selecting the video input type 1 Select System and choose Configuration then select the Channel button select the R1 or R2 tab and open the Video Input link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link 2 Locate the question What is your video input type Configuration for iVDR 1 System Video Input What is your video input type Analog Composite 4 Analog composite video is not present SDI Component Analog composite input settings NTSC with Pedestal 7 5 IRE Use Automatic gain control Cancel Use the scroll button if necessary to locate the question 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 107 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration 3 Select a video input Your selection takes effect immediately without closing the Configuration dialog box e SDI component Make this selection to record SDI component video connected to the record channel s SD input If a warning message is displayed about SDI not present verify that and SDI signal is connected When you select SDI component video there are no other configuration options available Proceed to Configuring the VITC reader on page 110 e Analog composite Make
170. eaeeeeees 290 Using Protocol Recorder Local Control tasks ccccccecceeseeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeaeeees 293 Using Protocol Player Local Control tasks cccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseesaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeas 293 Playout using Current ANd preview CLIPS cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenas 293 Skipping to the preview clip during playout ececccsesseeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 295 Jumping tO a SPECIFIC timecode ceseeecccccecceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeseeaeueeeeeesssaeeeseeenas 295 Monitoring remote Control COMMUNICATIONS ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeesanaeeeeseaeeeeens 297 Appendix A Specifications AC power specification 222 25 dhcesestiveiex sass tesceeetedeces Seesaghds senhandecandedencate bavidesuuseeetacaee 300 Environmental Sp CifiCations ccccccssccccceececceceeeeeceeeeeecseceaeeeseeaeeessnseseesseaesesees 300 WMeCManiGal SOCCIICATIONS esseri AN 301 EIECINIGAl SPECIICALONS crna a a tind a aaa 301 Serial Digital Video SDI rea ele hele ah clei eek ales 301 Composite Analog VidGO ccccccccccssessseeceeeececeseeeeeeeseeeseceeeesaesaueeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaas 302 Genlock RElErenCe saasina ne adel eee neediest r ect 302 SYSE TA eaa neni eerste ee Near re rne Wey nt eee a rer emer 303 AES EBU Digtal Audio siecle en ct ei i a steal clue 303 Anag AUGO ots echsa see adage AR EA a a ER A AES 303 AUdIO MONIO canaries t a site cieduadteg cbaetasseigednstil begun 304 Audio hea
171. ections in the list cccecseeccceceeeeecceeeeeeceeeececsseaeeessanseeeessesaseesseneeeeees 213 6 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Renaming Sections isis sn ioe a teat Aves ide hese beu be sdature encetlen gaeey 213 Selecting the section end properties c cc ceseeseeeceeeeeceeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeaas 213 Adding pause at the end of all section events ccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 214 Removing pause at the end of all section events ccceseeeecseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeaees 215 Managing Playlist ceense A 216 Renaming a playlister neea E E a E E 216 Selecting the playlist timecode 2 0 0 0 ccceccceeeseeeeceeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeessesaeaeeeseess 216 Changing the list thumbnail image ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaas 217 Locating a list in the Clips PANG cccccseeccecceeeseeeeeeeeceeseeeeeeeaeeaaeeeseeeesaageeeess 218 Savina list s a OLOONA Me cenccscsaseece Sines E aacacduene aeeanceniens 218 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Guide To Using the Clips DANG seei deen cence eles boeneesenenceeeecn E 220 Viewing the Clips pane cz ct secerer sce teccsete cet sec come beaetwreinsanceteteescncmseachaasereee maceceeziee 220 Terms used in the Clips Dans sais eae etee rte hteseonewteesecaticeecieeleeoeedee denies 222 About the Current Bin drop down liSt cccccccececsesseeeeeceeeeeeeseeseaeaeeseeeeeeeeeess 223 About the Cli
172. ed network for standard data network tasks and the high speed network for streaming transfers between iVDRs 100BaseT Configuration 1VDR and Profile XP streaming Follow these instructions if you use the network for streaming media transfers to non M Series devices such as the Profile XP Media Platform Connecting the Ethernet network cabling Connect as illustrated The high speed 1 Gb connection is available only if you have the optional card installed Panas P2 OUT OO EF mpst Loop Thru O S H2 P2L T oe O O SS P R2 CH1 2 CH1 6 Nour P2 CH2 1000BT Network lo OO I ES og e i a CH2 10 100BT Network SS A S FRONT RS422 RS422 0 PANEL 10Bt WN PORT 1 PORT 3 1008t VGA PORT 2 SCSI PORT 4 1000Bt 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual with optional card only 37 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR 38 100BaseT Configuration Data and streaming between iVDRs After making 100BaseT network connections as described in Connecting the Ethernet network cabling on page 37 use the following procedure to configure the network settings Once configured you can perform the following tasks e General n
173. ed to export clips or programs to local windows drives or networked devices Export file types include SMPTE 360M gxf or AVI DV avi file format See Sending media to a file on page 262 or Sending assets to another machine on page 265 224 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 About the Clips pane context menu Menu Item Description Import Opens the Import dialog box which is used to import assets from the following sources Media streams from another iVDR or Profile XP Media Platform via the network Other files formats including SMPTE 360M gxf and AVI DV avi from a local drive or over the network See Importing media from a file or a device on page 258 Search Opens the Search dialog box which is used to perform basic or advanced searches See Locating assets on page 243 Links Opens the Links dialog box allowing you to locate other assets that are linked to the selected asset For example a subclip is linked to the source clip See Locating assets on page 243 Empty Recycle Bin Permanently removes all items from the Recycle Bin By default deleted assets are moved to the Recycle Bin and remain there until it is emptied See Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 242 for information on deleting assets without using the Recycle Bin Select All Selects all items in the asset list Operations available for Select All include d
174. ee Selecting the video input type on page 107 to select the record channel video source e See Changing the timecode source on page 152 to select the record channel timecode source Missing or intermittent timecode If the selected timecode source is missing 1 e LTC not connected or VITC is not detected the current timecode display shows XX XX XX XX Also clips recorded without timecode will show no mark in mark out timecode after recording When LTC is detected but the signal is intermittent the last valid timecode is displayed anytime the LTC signal disappears Clips with missing or intermittent timecode will show this behavior during playback in a play channel If external timecode is intermittent or missing try one of the following solutions e Use the internal timecode generator as the timecode source for recording See Changing the timecode source on page 152 e Stripe the timecode after the clip is recorded using the Player application See Striping timecode replacing the timecode track on page 177 Re recording and appending clips is not supported through the user interface You cannot record over a previously recorded clip To replace the unwanted clip delete it and record a new one Also appending previously recorded clips is not supported that is once the recording is stopped you cannot start the recording again using the same clip If a clip is currently loaded when record is selected the c
175. eeeeeeeseeasaaeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaas 163 Loading a Clip from the Clips pane cccccsesseeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeees 165 Loading a clip TOM Play CF esnrac eee Sitch eee ia nd stance ead eia 166 FAV WAG a GINO eea nash tutta A 167 Selecting loop play jee czaccet oa ce sd a euch ke edatatbonceeanee na Gouaxckenuee 167 WO GATING ASCO iss et naan a e aentag seen aiciwiadednearsaned N 167 JUMPING tO a SPECIFIC timecode cesseeecccceceeeeeeeceecceeeeeceeecaeseaueeeeesseaaeeseeessaaseges 168 Using the scrub bar in the Goto Dialog cccccceccesceaseeeeeeeeeceeeeeesseaeaesseeeeeeeeeees 169 Using Cue points for DPlaAyOack cccceccccssssseeeeececeeeeceeceeeseesseeeeesauaaeeceesessaaaeeeeess 170 ADOULMUSING CUE DOINGS 2acncrosttecsxced an a EE 170 VIEWING THE CUC IST suchas ot tte wis Faia Secon Jesse aes ua E 171 PRAGIIAG se CUS OOM essai Noe she es ae Sei el ee 171 Removing a CHE DOIN sccycdedreet ceedoet cs acc ccncecsnws E a Ea 171 Jump to the selected cue point cccccccceccssseeeeeeceeeueeecececeseaeceseeseaaseeseeessanages 171 Jump to the next cue point x coset tintin eve eee dacete er oc serach eater ecees teeacseeectoes 172 Renaming a cue DONA ag okie a a wheel etapa ati t 172 Viewing clib DRODETU CS 2528 8 scaacian E E acm ieee taeda keesarame anes 173 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual Contents Renaming a clp NT PIAV CMs vetied ete oho seein a a a a 173 Editi
176. el input instead of displaying a still frame See Selecting E to E mode on page 182 Help Opens online help Current and Preview Clip humbnail A Used to visually identify the current clip loaded in Player When AMP and VDCP protocols are used the thumbnail includes the current and preview clip You can click or touch the thumbnail image to toggle between the preview and current clip thumbnails This allows you to identify the preview clip before it plays Generally the preview clip begins playing after the current clip completes at which point the preview clip becomes the current clip 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 291 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols Control Description and User Operation Time Dome This multi function control displays play progress or play progress Progress with media marks which shows the relative position of mark in 8 only mark out points in the clip The timecode underneath indicates play 00 00 03 23 time remaining Progress The Time Dome is also used to enable and indicate loop play mode gt gt with media marks Select and hold the Time Dome then select Loop Play in the pop up 00 00 02 15 menu Progress P amp loop play 00 00 08 21 enabled Set Mark in and Set These buttons are used to set new mark in or mark out points Mark out Position the clip to the desired frame then click or touch the In or Out Out buttons Unused media is no
177. elect the view mode best for you 1 In List view select the context menu button then choose Options The Options dialog box appears 2 In the Options dialog box select the View button The View settings page appears Views Text view Show Start time Monitor Thumbnail view Cancel 3 Select a view mode Text View displays events in text form including an event icon name and an additional attribute selectable using the Show drop down list Show attributes include the following duration name only start time or start time and duration Thumbnail View displays events in thumbnail form along with the event name 4 Select OK to save settings and close the Options dialog 194 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Setting monitor information Setting monitor information You can select the monitoring information displayed for the list The selections you make determine the list attributes that are displayed in the following locations e List information displayed in the Monitor Pane List information is displayed under the channel monitor in the Monitor pane You can select the list attributes displayed in the Monitor pane e Countdown timecode displayed in the Playlist toolbar The countdown timer can count down to the next section the next event or the end of list To select the monitor mode aiiis 1 In List view select the context menu button then choose Options aa Wier The Opt
178. elete send to and copy See Selecting multiple assets on page 234 Help Opens online help for the Clips pane M Series User Manual 225 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane About the asset context menu To open the asset context menu touch and hold the asset using the touch panel or right click the asset using a mouse Options Send To Cut Copy Paste Rename Delete Links Properties Length 12 91 20 16 33 11 29 00 13 10 09 4 Menu Item Description Options Opens the Options dialog box which allows you to change the way assets are displayed in the asset list See Modifying the asset list view on page 227 Send To Opens the Send To dialog box which is used to send assets to a different location another bin disk volume or another 1VDR Profile XP Media Platform or any networked device that supports GXF media transfers Send To is also used to export clips or programs to local windows drives or networked devices Export file types include SMPTE 360M gxf or AVI DV avi file format See Sending media to a file on page 262 or Sending assets to another machine on page 265 Cut Copy Paste Used to move assets or make a additional copies Copying a clip does not consume media disk space Only a new reference to existing media is created See Moving an asset to another bin on page 235 Rename
179. en jumps to the first frame of the next event Show black Adding pause at the end of all section events To force a pause at the end of all section events 1 Select the section in the List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following 214 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Removing pause at the end of all section events see fii e Select the context menu button then choose the Properties e Select the Properties button 3 Select All Events to display the End Property Page 4 Select the Change event pauses check box then choose the Add a pause to every event option Section 1 Properties Section 1 a General i Location i fdefault List_1 GPI Change event pauses Remove all pauses All Events Add a pause to every event Freeze on last frame Cancel 5 Use the drop down list to choose whether to Show black Show E to E Freeze on last frame or Freeze on next event 6 Press the OK button Each event s properties are modified to include the specified pause type During playback each event will remain paused at its end until you intervene The pause symbol appears next to the events in List view Removing pause at the end of all section events To remove pauses at the end of all section events 1 Select the section in the List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following oti e Select the context menu button then cho
180. ennen E ea ii e italy 202 Playing a list using GPI input triQQerS cccccceeeseeeececeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeseeeeees 202 Viewing list DroperntieS orenian a a asec 203 Creatinga IOOD ING Stanisa aa a E a oe core ee aaa 203 LOCKING AlS Eein a ee ee S ae le ei et ea 204 Modifying events in the liSt cccccccssececeeseeeeceeeeececceeeeecseceseeceeasessensaseesseaeeeeees 205 About editing events while playing a liSt cccccccccessesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 205 Moving Event In and Event Out marks cccccceecceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeesaaeeeeens 205 Clearing Event In Event OUt marks ccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseneas 207 Pausing at the end of an Oven veiects oct s Sieceen tee ete geseerah ad edadasl cree ceaiccnsenedelakeae 208 Changing the event thumbnail Mage cccccceceessssseeeeeeeeeeesesaeaeaeeeeeeeeees 209 Adjusting the event audio leVel ccscecccccsecsececeeecceeseeeeeeseaesesseeeeeseeesesseeeeas 209 Moving evente INTO HIST anire a p e ai 210 Viewing play event properties ccceccccsscecccesecececseeeeeceasceeseeseeeseeaeeeessaaess 210 Renaming an EVEN sorina a a 211 Locat the source CIID ess aS 211 Managing sections in the IiSt ccceceeececcesseeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeuseeceansueeeseeeeessenseeeeees 212 Adding and removing SECTIONS cccseseeececccecceeeeeeecceeseeeeeseaeseseeeeesssaesessenenas 212 Moving s
181. enter 32 82 monitor audio volume control 127 Monitor pane channel info displaying 124 133 channel information displaying 135 control application drop down list 133 136 full screen mode selecting 128 full screen views 134 single and multi channel views toggling between 135 monitoring transfers 87 267 mouse connecting 26 MPEG 2 I Frame only compression selecting 105 N network 100BaseT setup 38 1GBaseT setup 42 cabling connecting 37 host file setup 43 49 host names adding 39 44 50 130 ProfileXP streaming to 47 testing 52 M Series User Manual NTSC setup selecting 108 O Odetics Protocol 278 onscreen transport controls 78 P play channel generating VITC 116 still play mode 115 Player assignable buttons 160 auto subclip mode 181 clip locating 161 167 clip marks clearing 175 clip properties viewing 161 170 clip timecode display 160 clip renaming 161 173 context menu items description 161 cue points using for playback 170 E to E mode 161 164 181 editing mark points 162 174 EE or PB indicator 160 jump to a timecode 161 168 loading clips 161 163 166 meter bar button 162 playing programs 185 Scrub Bar 174 subclips creating 161 179 thumbnail 161 176 time dome display modifying 161 playing a clip 57 Playlist assignable buttons 190 context menu items description 190 countdown display options 161 164 189 195 creating a list 196 creating a list quickstart 59 editing a lis
182. er 38 25 63 10 x acme com x Client host 127 0 0 1 localhost 192 168 99 11 iVDR 1 he0 192 168 99 12 iVDR 2 he0 192 168 99 13 iVDR 3 he0 3 Save the file and exit the text editor 4 Reboot your machine 5 Copy the new hosts file onto all the other machine to save you editing it again 6 Proceed to Add network hosts names for streaming Add network hosts names for streaming You must add the host names of all peer 1V DRs on the network that support streaming transfers Adding host names is required to allow selection of networked iVDRs in the AppCenter user interface and to provide a successful network connection for streaming The host names added will appear in the Import and Send to dialog boxes NOTE By default the iVDR host name is the same as the Windows computer name To determine the iVDR computer name right click My Computer on the Windows desktop then properties Select the Network Identification tab and look for the Full computer name In addition if you are using remote protocol to perform video network transfers you Il need to assign a unique Controller ID number for each host name If you are not using remote protocol for network transfers you can leave the Controller Id blank 44 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 1GBaseT Configuration Data and streaming between iVDRs To add a network host names 1 Start AppCenter if it is not already running using the desktop shortcut
183. er 4 Modifying Configuration 5 Make selections as follows e Analog records the analog audio connected to the record channel s analog audio input e AES records the AES EBU digital audio connected to the record channel s AES EBU audio input e SDI Embedded records the embedded audio signal on the Record channel s SDI input When you select SDI Embedded you must also select an embedded audio group through 4 as shown in the diagram A warning message is displayed when no signal is detected for the audio input you select NOTE Audio ts output simultaneously on all audio outputs When using embedded audio you must ensure that the correct embedded audio group is selected for each play channel SDI output See Configuring SDI output embedded audio on page 120 6 Select OK to save and apply all changes at once Adjusting the analog audio input trim Each record channel features a trim control for the analog audio inputs The slider control trims the audio input levels of channel 1 2 simultaneously prior to sampling Use this control to adjust the audio input when working with analog audio signals that are too low or high To adjust the analog audio input trim for the record channel 1 Select System and choose Configuration select Channel select the R1 or R2 tab 2 Open the Audio Input Trim link if needed then locate the analog audio trim control Configuration for iVDR 1 Rmo A syste
184. er Manual 223 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane About the Clips pane context menu Select the Clips pane context menu button Cw to access items in the context menu New Bin Options _ Properties Delete 3 Rename Send To v Import Search Links Empty Recycle Bin Select All The following table describes the Clips pane context menu items Menu Item Description New Bin Creates a new bin in the current disk volume Use the onscreen or external keyboard to enter the bin name See Creating a new bin on page 231 Options Opens the Options dialog box which allows you to change the way assets are displayed in the asset list See Modifying the asset list view on page 227 Properties Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected asset See Viewing clip properties on page 272 Delete Deletes the selected asset See Deleting a bin on page 232 or Deleting an asset on page 239 Rename Opens the Rename dialog box for the selected asset Use the onscreen keyboard or an external keyboard to enter the new asset name See Renaming a bin on page 233 or See Renaming an asset on page 234 Send To Opens the Send To dialog box which is used to send assets to a different location another bin disk volume or another 1VDR Profile XP Media Platform or any networked device that supports GXF media transfers Send To is also us
185. es O OQ ouo OONO OSO 2a eoe a a OO SDI O C e O Timecode E ee e000 eo SCSI Analog audio Channel 1 L A gt Channel 2 R _ p 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 25 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Keyboard mouse and VGA monitor connections If your M Series iVDR does not have the optional Front Panel these connections are required for local operation If your M Series 1VDR has the optional Front Panel these connections are not required However keyboard mouse and monitor provide an alternate means to operate your M Series iVDR For example if you need to enter extensive text or number sequences you might find the keyboard easier to use You may also want to connect an external VGA display to monitor operations on a larger screen size however you must first enable the VGA output Refer to Enabling the VGA monitor output on page 86 NOTE You can use the USB connectors provided along the edge of the optional Front Panel to connect a keyboard or mouse Do not connect ee Tio c is R2 amp P DI R2 amp P2 e MON ae JONO at P2 LTC ae Composite R1 amp P 6 IN P1 P1 O IN a a Pi O E a
186. ete the process The disk is ready for use 94 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Reading CD ROMs and DVDs in other iVDRs or computers Reading CD ROMs and DVDs in other iVDRs or computers 20 April 2005 After writing data to CD R RW or DVD disks in the iVDR you must make the disk compatible before you can use it in another computer or device Making the disk compatible effectively closes the disk and it becomes read only You will not be able to write any more data to the disk so make sure you are finished storing data on the disk before making it compatible You can exchange disks between 1VDRs without making the disk compatible if you read the disk with the same type drive used to burn the disk For example use the DVD drive to read a CD R RW that was burned using the DVD drive If the destination 1VDR doesn t have the optional DVD drive you must make the CD R RW compatible before inserting it in the iVDR CD ROM drive To make a CD R RW or DVD disk compatible with other computers 1 Connect an external keyboard if needed If you normally operate your 1VDR using the optional Front Panel touch screen you should connect keyboard and mouse before proceeding Refer to Keyboard mouse and VGA monitor connections on page 26 for instructions You will likely find it easier to make selections using a keyboard and mouse rather than the touch screen You might need to restart Windows to make the mouse and keyboard operatio
187. eted Bypass the Recyle Bin m newsclips 3 Select the Remove items immediately when deleted option 242 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Locating assets NOTE Holding down the SHIFT key on an external keyboard during delete also bypasses the Recycle Bin 4 Close the Organize Bins dialog box Locating assets Three tools are provided for locating assets Sorting Search and Links You can set how assets are sorted by selecting the sort by attribute for the asset list For example you can sort by name modified date length etc The Search dialog box provides both basic search and advanced search modes for locating assets anywhere in the iVDR media storage Advanced search mode allows you to define search criteria for assets based on user defined metadata The Links dialog box helps you determine assets that are related For example you can locate the source clip used to generate a subclip or you can determine if there are copies of a given clip Topics in this section include Sorting assets in the Asset List on page 243 Using Basic search on page 244 Viewing recent search results on page 247 Using Advanced Search on page 247 Finding linked assets on page 250 Sorting assets in the Asset List You can sort assets by file attributes such as date name length and create date using the Options dialog box To change how assets are sorted 1 Open the Options dialog box
188. etworking tasks such as file sharing and mapping network drives e Remote control of the 1VDR using devices and applications software developed for the M Series 1VDR that use industry standard remote control protocols over Ethernet e Streaming media transfers between 1VDRs This procedure guides you to relevant settings but does not instruct you on the specific settings required for your network It is assumed that you understand Ethernet networks in general and your particular network needs and that you can apply that understanding to make the required settings using standard Windows procedures If you need help with these procedures contact your network administrator Procedure summary e Configure Windows network settings on page 38 e Add network hosts names for streaming on page 39 Configure Windows network settings 1 If you normally operate your M Series 1VDR using the optional Front Panel touch screen you should connect keyboard and mouse before proceeding Refer to Keyboard mouse and VGA monitor connections on page 26 for instructions You will likely find it easier to configure your network using a keyboard and mouse rather than the touch screen You may need to restart Windows to make the mouse and keyboard operational 2 Shut down AppCenter as follows a In the AppCenter toolbar select System then choose Shutdown in the pop up menu The Shutdown dialog box appears b Using the drop down list
189. ew the advanced search criteria list When Advanced search is used Basic search criteria is ignored 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 247 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Lookin V Find items that match these criteria Add created Before 10 03 03 pvas Remove Advanced Length gt 00 10 00 00 Cancel 4 Select Add to add new search criteria or select Remove to remove it then click OK to start the search Add Criteria Attribute Compression Format Condition Is Value DY25 Cancel The following table lists the advanced search attributes along with their conditions and value choices Advanced searches can include metadata attributes Since these are user defined only their types and conditions are listed here See also Working with asset metadata on page 252 248 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Advanced Search Criteria Using Advanced Search Attributes Conditions Value Value Name Like Not Like Name N A Type Is Is Not Clip N A Program List Compression Is Is Not DV25 N A Format MPEG Video Standard Is Is Not PAL N A NTSC Create Date Between Date 1 Date 2 Before Date After Date Modified Date Between Date 1 Date 2 Before Date After Date Length Greater Than Length Less Than Length Equals Length Between Length 1 Length 2 Locked Is True False N A Drop frame Is True False N A timecode Data Type Conditions Valu
190. ewed and then inserted Insert Displayed when Playlist is running on the active channel in List View Inserts selected assets into the playlist Note Pushing in on the front panel selection knob or double clicking the asset in the asset list performs the same function as touching the context button Assignable Buttons Properties Ctrl Search New Bin Ctrl N Options Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignments to best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one second opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Properties Opens the Properties dialog for the selected asset See Viewing clip properties on page 272 Search Opens the search dialog box See Locating assets on page 243 New Bin Creates a new bin To create a new bin in the current disk volume click New Bin then enter the new bin name using onscreen or external keyboard See Working with bins on page 230 Options Opens the options dialog box which allows you to modify how assets are displayed in the asset list See Modifying the asset list view on page 227 Delete Deletes the selected item s See Deleting a bin on page 232 or Deleting an asset on page 239 Rename Opens the rename dialog box See Renaming an asset on page 234 Send to Opens the Send to dialog box used to send the asset to a file or streaming transfer to another
191. eyboard shortcuts Guide to using the Front Panel Monitoring the system using the StatusBar Using the StatusPane Writing data to the CD R RW and DVD drives on page 93 M Series User Manual 61 Chapter 3 Product Description Product overview The M Series 1VDR is a multi channel video digital recorder that allows four channels of simultaneous record and playback Media is stored on internal disk drives Storage capacity depends on the disk option installed and the video compression settings selected See Determining storage capacity on page 66 The 1VDR includes a built in digital recorder application that handles essential tasks record edit play and create play event lists The optional front panel includes an TFT display with touch screen and transport controls to allow easy operation and monitoring with minimal external connections 1 Key features Simultaneous access to common storage Simultaneous access to common storage by all four channels means that you can play a clip that is still being recorded and that the a clip can be played simultaneously and independently on multiple channels Optional Front Panel The optional front panel features 640 by 480 TFT display with touch screen and VTR like transport controls The front panel can be tilted to a convenient operating angle or removed and operated as a desktop device using an optional 15 foot extension cable and cradle The u
192. f the offset time entered exceeds the event or section length a warning message is displayed 5 Select OK to save settings 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 201 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Playing a list Once the list is completed you can play it using the onscreen or front panel transport controls The following sections describe playout using these controls Starting playout To begin playout e Open the list then press Play OF e Select an event in the list then press Play Other playout operations While playback is in progress you can perform the following operations using the front panel transport controls touch screen and Playlist user interface If you don t have a front panel use the keyboard shortcuts for all transport controls See Using Keyboard shortcuts on page 79 To do this continue playout after a pause in the list select the Play button play the next event press the Play and FF buttons OYLr select Goto and then choose Next Event in the Goto pop up menu play the next section press the Play button and hold the FF button down _or select Goto and then choose Next Section in the Goto pop up menu Skip playback to any event or section in the list first press and hold the Play button then select the event or section using the touch screen Select an event or section to playback first select the event or section then click
193. faut 04 23 03 12 08 PM a Recycle Bin Bin Name mybin 5 Select the Send button to close the Send dialog box and move the file NOTE Move is a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor Refer to Guide to using the Transfer Monitor on page 267 Copying an asset The copy command creates a new asset that references the same media files belonging to the original asset Copying an asset does not duplicate the media files Copying does not change impact the media storage space available You can copy or move assets in two ways The naming convention for copied assets in the same bin adds an underscore _ and a number after the original name For example the copied clip for Clip1 will be Clipl_1 Clip1_2 and so on 236 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Copying an asset Using the copy and paste commands 1 Select the asset s in the asset list using the front panel touch screen the front panel selection knob or a mouse 2 Copy the asset to the clipboard using one of the following e Select Copy in the asset context menu or e Select Edit in the AppCenter toolbar then choose Copy e Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl C 3 If needed change the current bin to the target bin Refer to Changing current bin using Look in drop down list on page 230 4 Paste the asset s from the clipboard to the current bin The Paste operation is accessed in the same
194. following In the AppCenter toolbar select Tools then choose Transfer Monitor from the pop up menu OYT In the AppCenter Statusbar select the Transfer Monitor button Eg The Transfer Monitor button appears when a transfer job is present or pending Transfer Monitor pages and buttons In the Transfer Monitor transfer jobs are categorized and displayed on one of three pages Sending Receiving and Completed pages On each page the transfer jobs are displayed using a thumbnail image along with a brief description of its source destination and status Jobs that have encountered errors are shown in red text 20 April 2005 Source The source of the transfer job If the source includes multiple files the first file name is displayed plus a sign beside it You may find the full path of all the source files from the Properties page Destination The destination of the transfer job You may find the full path of all the source files from the Properties page Status For ongoing transfer jobs the transfer rate is displayed in megabytes per second and percentage of job completed All jobs waiting in the queue are shown as Pending Jobs that encountered errors are displayed in red text along with an error code Remove Button Used to remove jobs from the Transfer queue Abort Button Used to cancel transfer jobs in progress Properties Button Used to view more detailed information about a transfer jo
195. from a file or a device Assets are imported into 1VDR media storage from two sources File You can import media using standard media file formats Supported formats include SMPTE 360M gxf or AVI DV avi Imported files can be located on a local 1VDR disk drive fixed or removable media or a mapped networked drive See also AVI file encoding requirements for importing on page 307 Stream The 1VDR supports media transfers over the standard Ethernet port or optional network adapters Source devices for streaming include other 1VDRs Grass Valley Profile XP Media Platform or any device that supports SMPTE 360M GXF streaming transfers You must configure your network for streaming transfers prior to using the Import to stream feature See Setting up the Ethernet network on page 37 A transfer job is created for each import operation Once created transfer jobs are added to the transfer job queue where they are dispatched in a first in first out basis Up to four transfer jobs can execute simultaneously Any additional jobs wait in the queue You can use the Transfer Monitor to check the status of your transfers Guide to using the Transfer Monitor on page 267 NOTE Before playing a clip that is being imported from a file or stream use the Transfer Monitor to verify that the clip transfer rate is higher than the clip data rate This is required to prevent playback problems due to insufficient bandwi
196. from another IVDR or Profile XP system 1 In the Clips pane select the current bin For help see Changing current bin using Look in drop down list on page 230 The current bin is the destination bin for the import operation 2 Select the Clips pane context menu button Cw then choose Import The Import dialog box opens Source Look in iVDR 2 V inewsclips i Clip_1 05 27 03 04 39 PM Clip_2 05 27 03 04 39 PM Clip_3 05 27 03 04 44 PM Clip_4 05 27 03 04 45 PM Clip_5 05 27 03 04 51 PM File Name Clip_1 Destination Bin Name Viinewsclips Clip Name Cipt o Z oOo Cancel 3 Select Stream NOTE The appearance of the asset list and file open dialog boxes is determined by the View Option setting Use the Clips pane context menu to choose Image or Text view See Modifying the asset list view on page 227 4 In the Source section browse to locate and select the source file About browsing in the Import dialog box Browsing Non M Series Devices Browsing a non M Series device such as a Profile XP Media Platform is not supported You must select the device and then manually enter the disk volume and bin name e g EXT default and the file name to import Note that the path is case sensitive Browsing another M Series iVDR The Look in label shows the current location The list under the Look in label displays the contents of the current location You can select items in the list such as machine
197. g another M Series iVDR The Stream to label shows the current destination The list under the Stream to label displays the contents of the current location You can select items in the list a machine disk volume or a bin to explore its contents Clicking the up arrow button moves up one directory level in the storage hierarchy M Series User Manual 265 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane The Stream to drop down list allows you to choose from one of the most recent target locations used history 4 Select Send to transfer the asset s NOTE Send to stream is a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor See Guide to using the Transfer Monitor on page 267 to view the job status If the operation fails for any reason the asset is deleted from the target location 266 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Guide to using the Transfer Monitor Guide to using the Transfer Monitor The Transfer Monitor is used to monitor all 1VDR transfer jobs and their status A transfer job is created for each send to or import operation Once created transfer jobs are added to the transfer job queue where they are dispatched in a first in first out basis Up to four transfer jobs can execute simultaneously Any additional jobs wait in the queue You can use the Transfer Monitor to check the status of your transfers Starting the Transfer Monitor To start Transfer Monitor perform one of the
198. g colorbars on page 117 Adjusting analog composite output levels 1 Select System and choose Configuration then select the Channel button select the P1 or P2 tab and open the Video Output link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link Configuration for iVDR 1 system 7 Video Output Analog composite output settings NTSC with Pedestal 7 5 IRE Video Gain frit default Chroma Gain mir default Chroma Phase frit default Cancel Use the scroll button to view all the settings 114 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Adjusting video output Configuration for iVDR 1 Black Level imin default Sharpness frit default Default JogfStill Play Mode Field Line interpolated Frame Interlaced Cancel 2 Make your video output adjustments or select Default to return all video output settings to their factory default values See also Setting record channel NTSC pedestal on page 108 for related record channel settings These composite analog video output settings are active and can be monitored on the video output without closing the Configuration dialog box 3 Change other settings as necessary in the Configuration dialog box then select OK to save and apply all changes at once Selecting the Jog Still Play mode setting Jog Still Play mode settings determine how to generate the still play signal for the play channel when it is setup to
199. ge other settings as necessary in the Configuration dialog box then select OK to save and apply all changes at once Setting analog video automatic gain control The automatic gain control AGC feature automatically adjusts the chrominance and luminance on the video input signal to the proper levels by monitoring the sync and color burst portions of the signal Automatic gain control is enabled by default This is the best practice for most applications You may need to disable AGC in systems where sync and burst are reinserted in the video path several times or in any case where the sync and burst signals do not correlate or track the active picture portion of the signal Also if there is excessive hum riding on the video input signal the AGC circuits will tend to modulate the picture level at that frequency in an attempt to compensate for the problem If you think you are experiencing one of these problems try turning off AGC while monitoring the record channel in E to E mode no clip loaded in Recorder To enable disable automatic gain control 1 Select System and choose Configuration then select the Channel button select the R1 or R2 tab and open the Video Input link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link 2 Locate the statement Analog composite input settings Configuration for iVDR 1 System i S7 Video Input What is your video input type Analog Composite SDI Component
200. gives a visual indication of the percent complete as well as a countdown from the specified length down to 00 00 00 00 To specify clip length after recording has begun 1 Select Length in the Recorder pane The timecode dialog box appears 2 Enter the desired length using the onscreen keypad or external keyboard then select OK or Enter If the entered length is valid longer than the amount of material already recorded the clip continues to record until it reaches the specified length or until you select Stop 144 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Using Continuous Record mode Using Continuous Record mode You can configure Recorder for Continuous Record mode Continuous record is useful for applications that normally use Loop Record for example a manual time delay The following sections describe how continuous record works and how to set up a continuous recording About Continuous Record mode Operational considerations To start continuous record About Continuous Record mode Continuous record mode allows you to specify a fixed length recording that records continuously When the fixed length you specify is reached the iVDR begins to erase the oldest media in 3 minute segments to make room for new media In this way new media is continuously recorded while the recording is kept to a fixed length The continuous recording is stored in the iVDR as a program The program thumbnail is displayed in t
201. guration dialog box then select OK to save and apply all changes at once 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 125 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Front Panel settings You can modify the operation of the Front Panel controls The controls you can modify are e Adjusting the jog shuttle knob ranges on page 126 e Enabling rear panel audio monitor volume control on page 127 e Setting start record button sequence on page 127 e Selecting full screen monitor mode on page 128 Adjusting the jog shuttle knob ranges 1 Select System choose Configuration and select the Panel button The Front Panel settings are displayed Configuration for iVDR 1 What is the range of jog speeds 1X to 1X 1X to 3X What is the range of shuttle speeds 16X to 16X 32X to 32X VAR setting Default Always start at the preset var setting Cancel 2 Make jog shuttle and VAR variable speed play settings to control the sensitivity of the Jog Shuttle knob and the initial play speed used when variable speed play is selected The Always start at the preset var setting option determines the initial play speed when the variable speed play is started When this option is selected initial play speed is determined by the VAR setting then you can adjust the play speed using the Jog Shuttle knob RANGE 1x normal playback speed When this option is cleared the initial play speed is determined by the play
202. h of the clip To select time of day source for the clip see Selecting Time of day source for event scheduling on page 103 Start time After choosing this option select the timecode entry control and enter a start timecode value The new timecode track will contain continuous values ranging from the specified starting value to the starting value plus the length of the clip Drop frame The drop frame option is available when system timing is set to 525 line standard Drop frame allows the timecode track to indicate the actual running time of the clip 178 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Creating Subclips Creating Subclips A subclip is a clip created by referencing a portion of media from another clip or program For example if you recorded a two hour clip you could create several short subclips to use as previews or advertisements Each subclip refers to a small portion of the original clip and is listed along with all other clips in the Clips pane When working with subclips the original clip is sometimes called the source clip After creating subclips you can delete the source clip See Deleting an asset on page 239 Subclips created from a clip that is currently recording can only have a mark out equal to the last frame that has been recorded when the subclip is created You cannot create a subclip longer than has been recorded under the assumption that the record will fill it in You can load subc
203. h dialog box then select a bin from the drop down list Otherwise the search runs on the entire disk volume V 3 Choose Basic search then specify search criteria on the Text Date and Type tabs The search is performed using the combination of search criteria on all three tabs Search by text If you know all or part of an asset name use the Text tab Select the text entry control then use the on screen or external keyboard to type all or part of the asset name in the Enter Search Text dialog box The default text search mode is any word or word portion For example if you enter the word fire search will find all asset names that contain fire for example fires and house fire For an exact phrase search use a single quote or double quote to specify the phrase For example if you enter forest fire search will locate all asset names that contain the phrase forest fire If the Search names only option is selected the search is applied to asset names If not selected the search includes all asset metadata Refer to Working with asset metadata on page 252 244 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 Using Basic search Look in V default Text i Date Type Find items that contain the following text forest Advanced Search names only Cancel Search by date If you are searching for assets created or modified within a specific date or time rang
204. hannel output 3 Do one of the following e For an existing event select Accept to propagate the change to the event in the list e For anew event select Insert to add the event to the list Using the event length control Entering a new event length moves the Event out point 1 Select the Length timecode entry control 2 Enter a new event length The event length changes by moving the event out point 3 Do one of the following e For an existing event select Accept to propagate the change to the event in the list e For anew event select Insert to add the event to the list Clearing Event In Event out marks Clearing an event mark resets the mark to the marks used in the source clip Event in is set to the mark in point of the source clip and event out is set to the mark out point of the source clip To clear an event mark do one of the following e With the event loaded in Event view select and hold the Event In or Event Out button then choose Clear Mark in the pop up menu e With the event loaded in Event view select the Event In or Event Out timecode control and select Clear then OK to clear the mark 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 207 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Mark Out x Clear Clear Select Clear then OK to clear the mark Pausing at the end of an event 1 Select the event in List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select th
205. he Clips pane immediately after the recording starts While recording you can load the continuous record program in Player for playout or to create subclips The media referenced by the subclips that you create is saved outside the continuous record program and does not subtract from the continuous record length The subclips can be inserted in Playlist as play events Operational considerations Consider the following when planning for Continuous Record operation 20 April 2005 Minimum continuous record length 6 minute Maximum continuous record length Maximum record length is limited by the amount of storage space and the compression settings used A message 1s displayed if the fixed length you enter exceeds the available disk space Minimum record to playback time 5 seconds Playback in continuous record can start no sooner than 5 seconds after the start of record Modifying the continuous record name or length You can modify the continuous record name or length during record If you reduce record length the oldest media outside the new record length is erased Stopping continuous record If the recording is stopped before the fixed length is reached the resulting program duration is the time elapsed since the recording started Like normal record mode you cannot stop then start a continuous recording Once record is stopped you must eject the program and create a new continuous record Transferring the continuous reco
206. he audio monitor source NOTE Saved audio levels are used every time the clip is loaded and played Unsaved changes are lost when the clip is ejected 4 Select the Meterbar button again to return to Player view Selecting the audio monitor source In iVDRs equipped with digital audio 4ch video you can select the stereo pair to monitor on the rear panel monitor outputs and the front panel headphone jack To select the audio monitor source 1 In Play view select the menu button Ge then choose Options The options dialog box opens Options Monitor audio channels land 3 and 4 Cancel 2 Select the audio pair to monitor then select OK to save changes Striping timecode replacing the timecode track The stripe timecode dialog allows you to overwrite the existing timecode track for the loaded clip You can replace the recorded timecode with time of day or a specific start timecode value 1 Load the clip in the Player 2 In Play view select the menu button then choose Stripe Timecode 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 177 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Stripe Timecode Se Replace timecode media with Time of day Start time 5 Drop frame 3 In the Stripe Timecode dialog box specify the replacement timecode Time of day The new timecode track will start with the current time of day and will contain continuous values ranging from the current time of day plus the lengt
207. he channel status and control operations as they take place remotely e Local and Protocol control Local control is enabled With this setting you must take care to avoid conflicts between local and remote control 4 If you use remote protocols to perform video network transfers you must setup the video network and the Controller Id as described in the Installation chapter Refer to Setting up the Ethernet network on page 37 282 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Guide to Protocol Recorder Protocol Only mode Guide to Protocol Recorder Protocol Only mode The Protocol control only mode allows you to only monitor the record channel operations and view clip information All control comes from the external device The buttons menu items and other interface controls are disabled You can select this mode by choosing the Protocol control only option in the Options dialog box See Selecting the control port and control mode on page 282 The following describes the controls and indicators in the Protocol control only mode Assignable Current Timecode Clip Name amp O Context Buttons Timecode Source Current Bin Menu Default buttons Switch to local control are shown mode to modify R2 Clip Location Yi hewsclips E Bile Pe yy ip Options P Out 06 02 144 22 Thumbnail Time Dome Protocol Monitor Button Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons
208. he thumbnail ts outside of the event s media the thumbnail is automatically changed to correspond to the event s mark in position Adjusting the event audio level 20 April 2005 The audio level for each event in the list is adjusted independently To adjust the event audio level 1 With the event loaded in the Event view select the Meterbar button 2 Adjust the audio level using the graphical faders or select Unity to return audio to the last saved level 00 29 39 01 v Gang Unity Save v a1 a2 4 3 Select Save to save changes to the event audio level NOTE Changing event audio levels does not affect the source clip Saved audio levels are stored and used every time the list is loaded and played Unsaved changes are lost when another list is loaded 4 Select the Meterbar button 4 again to return to List view M Series User Manual 209 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Moving events in the list To the change the order of events in a list perform one of the following e Drag and drop the event into another location in the list e Select an event in List view then select the context menu button and choose the Move Up or Move Down menu item The event moves up or down one position in the list e Use the Edit menu in the AppCenter toolbar or standard keyboard shortcuts to Copy Cut or Paste the event When you paste the event it is inserted after the currently selected event
209. ic IP address e Set up hosts files e Add network hosts names for streaming Set the static IP address This procedure guides you to relevant settings It is assumed that you understand Ethernet networks in general and your specific network needs and that you can apply that understanding to make the settings required for a streaming network using standard Windows procedures If you need help with these procedures contact your network administrator To set up the static IP address on the 1GBaseT adapter 1 If you normally operate your M Series 1VDR using the optional Front Panel touch screen you should connect keyboard and mouse before proceeding Refer to Keyboard mouse and VGA monitor connections on page 26 for instructions You will likely find it easier to configure your network using a keyboard and mouse rather than the touch screen You may need to restart Windows to make the mouse and keyboard operational 2 Shut down AppCenter as follows a In the AppCenter toolbar select System then choose Shutdown in the pop up menu The Shutdown dialog box appears 42 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 1GBaseT Configuration Data and streaming between iVDRs b Using the drop down list choose Exit to Windows then select OK AppCenter shuts down and the Windows desktop appears CAUTION The M Series is not a general purpose Windows workstation A The Windows configuration on the iVDR has been specifically
210. ick the clip name then use the onscreen or external keyboard to enter a new name Countdown Timecode 00 01 06 17 Indicates the time remaining for the clip Local Protocol Control Context Menu Options Load Goto Stripe Timecode Properties Locate E to E Help Options Opens the Options dialog box used to configure the protocol player application See Selecting the control port and control mode on page 282 Load Opens the load clip dialog box Goto Used to jump to a specific timecode in the current clip or skip to the preview clip The Goto Timecode dialog allows you to enter a timecode value or use the scrub bar ljiiiliil to jump to a specific position in the current clip See Jumping to a specific timecode on page 295 or Skipping to the preview clip during playout on page 295 Stripe Timecode Opens the Stripe Timecode dialog which allows you to replace the existing timecode track for the loaded clip You can replace with time of day or a specific start timecode See Striping timecode replacing the timecode track on page 177 Properties Opens the Properties dialog for the currently loaded clip Locate Locates the currently loaded clip in the Clips pane See Locating a clip on page 167 E to E In Eto E mode if the play channel is stopped with a clip loaded the play channel output is switched to the record chann
211. ing 173 searching for 244 247 thumbnail changing 161 176 trimming quick start 58 Clips pane asset list view modifying 227 assets copying 236 deleting 239 erasing unused media 239 finding linked assets 250 importing from device 260 importing from file 258 locating 243 locking 241 metadata 251 moving to another bin 235 renaming 234 searching 244 247 send to a device 265 send to file 262 send to file or device 262 creating a new bin 231 current bin changing 230 guide to using Clips pane 220 Recycle Bin bypassing 242 emptying 242 viewing contents 242 search results viewing resent 247 selecting multiple assets 234 sorting assets 243 split or full screen mode selecting 229 terms used in 222 closed captioning 306 colorbars on play channel output 117 composite video adjusting the output 114 specification 302 compression compression type selecting 105 VBI compression selecting 106 analog audio 316 GPI 316 LTC connector 315 RS 422 315 continuous record about 145 operational considerations 145 starting 146 controller Id 282 crash record 143 cue points about 170 adding 171 creating subclips from 181 jump to next 172 jumping to 171 removing 171 renaming 172 viewing the cue list 170 current bin 77 D data rate selecting 106 deleting assets 239 See also erase unused media 239 disk volume 77 222 properties viewing 275 display brightness adjusting 86 display mode hot keys 86 DV25 DV50 compression sele
212. ing and display Timecode VITC LTC INT Generator Time of day Start time Drop irame Cancel 2 Select the Timecode button 3 Choose a timecode source then select OK Timecode Source Description VITC Timecode is decoded from the video input Refer to Configuring the VITC reader on page 110 to configure how VITC lines are decoded LTC Timecode is read from the LTC input for the channel Generator Each record channel has a timecode generator that runs in one of the following modes Time of Day The generator is locked to the Windows Operating system real time clock Start time Specifies the timecode to use when the recording starts The drop frame option is enabled when the system timing is set to the 525 line standard Drop frame timecode allows the generator to operate as an accurate clock M Series User Manual 153 Chapter 6 Recording Clips Changing the current bin When recording starts the new clip is saved in the current bin The current bin is displayed under the clip name You can use the Clips pane to change the current bin To change the current bin for a record channel 1 Make sure the record channel is selected and displayed in the Applications pane 2 Select Clips in the AppCenter toolbar to open the Clips pane 3 In the Clips pane touch or click the Current Bin label then choose a bin from the list O RI Recorder P1 Player R2
213. ions dialog box appears 2 In the Options dialog box select the Monitor button The Monitor settings page appears Monitor the following values Event name Countdown to next event Next event name Section name Countdown to next section Next section name List name Countdown to end of list 3 Select one of the monitor information options 4 Select OK to save settings and close the Options dialog 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 195 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Creating a list Lists are created using the List view When Playlist is started the last list loaded on the play channel is opened automatically If the last list loaded has been deleted then an empty list containing one section and no events is created New lists are named List_n where n is the first number that results in a unique file name There is no eject operation in Playlist as there is always a list loaded To create a new list 1 Select the context menu button then choose the New List menu item The New List dialog box is displayed 2 Select the bin to store the list then edit the default name for the new list then click OK 3 The current list closes and the new one is created containing one section and no events Opening an existing list To open a list do the following 1 Select the context menu button then choose Open List The Open List dialog box appears 2 Locate and select the list you want
214. ips Out Length Control Application Drop List Player i Remote AMP p Remote BYW Remote YDCP v A1 a2 Recorder 1 No clip loaded 2 In the Monitor pane select the control application drop down list Recorder for a channel then choose an application The current applications closes and the selected applications opens The application appears in the applications pane Selecting the active channel e Click or touch any place within the desired channel monitor including the channel tab to select that channel and make it the active channel 136 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Chapter 6 Recording Clips 20 April 2005 Information in this chapter includes e Before using Recorder e Starting Recorder e Guide to using Recorder e Recording clips e Using Continuous Record mode e Using IEEE 1394 Record mode e Changing video compression settings e Selecting the audio monitor source e Changing the timecode source e Changing the current bin e Previewing a clip e Renaming a clip e Viewing clip properties e Locating a clip e Displaying available storage space M Series User Manual 137 Chapter 6 Recording Clips Before using Recorder Select record channel video timecode inputs Before you start recording you may need to check that you have the right record channel signal sources selected e S
215. is connected and at least one command set is sent M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Guide to Protocol Recorder Local Protocol mode Control Description and User Operation Meterbar Button Displays the Meterbar which contains the audio record level controls and signal meters Changes to the audio level are saved for the 4 channel Properties v A1 A2 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 287 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols Guide to Protocol Player Protocol Only mode The Protocol control only mode allows you to only monitor play channel operations and view clip information All control comes from the external device The buttons menu items and other interface controls are disabled You can select this mode by choosing the Protocol control only option in the Options dialog box See Selecting the control port and control mode on page 282 The following describes the indicators displayed Protocol control only mode Assignable Clip PBorEE ClipName amp Countdown Q Context Buttons Timecode Mode Current Bin Timecode Menu Default buttons Indicates the are shown selected mode Thumbnail Time Dome Protocol Current and Monitor Preview clips Button Control Description and User Operation Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the button assignment to best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one Properties secon
216. is in full screen mode channel information is superimposed over the moving video or thumbnail image See Displaying channel information in full screen mode on page 135 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 185 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Symbols used in Playlist The following table describes the symbols used in the Playlist List view to describe the properties of items in the list play events sections and the list itself Symbol Description T Locked The item is locked and cannot be edited Pause At the end of playout this item will cause playout to pause Repeat At the end of playout the item will repeat E oy GPI Output Trigger This event or section triggers one or more GPI outputs 186 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Starting Playlist Starting Playlist Playlist requires a single play channel If a play channel is currently being used by another application you can use the following steps to select the Playlist application Selecting the Playlist application causes the current play channel application to exit when Playlist is started To start Playlist on a play channel 1 In the toolbar select Split Screen and then Monitor R1 Recorder P1 Player R2 Recorder P2 Player Se E A g RI H y oe armet oe Control Application 14 19 37 10 14 30 05 2 14 20 56 27 02 15 01 26 j Clip_2 Clip_5 Clip_11 sn
217. is suspended when creating a subclip When creating subclips in Player erasing oldest media is suspended when the first mark is entered mark in or mark out This means that the continuous record program length may grow larger than the length specified Erasing media is resumed and the oldest media outside the fixed length is purged when the second mark is entered and you select the Accept button You could inadvertently fill storage space if you enter the subclip marks but fail to click the Accept button NOTE Erasing oldest media is also resumed when you exit subclip mode by ejecting the subclip or by clicking the Source Clip button Use genlocked inputs for time delay For error free time delay operation ensure that the video input is genlocked to the video reference signal See Reference Video connections on page 28 This will eliminate periodic picture shift To start continuous record 1 Select and hold the Time Dome Q i The Time Dome pop up menu appears 2 Choose Continuous Record in the pop up menu R1 44 29 50 23 nt Clip Clip_i z seston default New Clip Preview i H In Out ph Ay it Properties amp j 14 26 08 07 14 29 50 05 01 00 00 00 30 23 52 12 j v ai Gaz 4 gt Recorder 1 Clip_i recording gt The Time Dome changes to display continuous record D Default continuous 00 29 30 24 record length is 1 hour or the last record length used M Series
218. ist See Moving events in the list on page 210 Help opens online help for Playlist Save As Program Properties Locate Goto Move Down Assignable Buttons Assignable buttons allow you to modify the buttons located in the Playlist toolbar to best suit your workflow Holding down a button longer than one second opens the button pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices Time Cursor Croll bep EEEE The time cursor indicates the current play position The time cursor is displayed over the event currently being played 190 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 Guide to using Playlist List View Control Description and User Operation Event List The Event List contains play events Play events are created from clips or programs which can be added to the list in two ways drag and drop from the Clips pane or using the Insert button in List view Event view or in the Clips pane By default play events added to a list inherit the source clip s name but you can rename events anytime Play events and sections can be configured to trigger GPI outputs GPI triggers can be set to occur when the event or section starts ends or at these points plus or minus some offset A GPI trigger does not disrupt playout of the play events that following it See Using GPI output triggers in playlists on page 200 You can view the Event List in either the
219. ist properties viewing 273 program properties viewing 273 properties disk volume viewing 275 protocol monitor 87 284 286 289 292 Protocol Player local and protocol control 290 293 protocol control only 288 Protocol Recorder local and protocol control 285 293 protocol control only 283 protocols 278 R rack mounting rack slide adjustments 313 rack mount bracket adjusting 314 read only 158 241 rear panel view 69 Record channel video input selecting 107 Recorder assignable buttons 140 audio input level adjusting 142 available storage displaying 141 156 clip name changing 140 155 clip properties viewing 155 compression settings 151 context menu items 141 continuous record mode 145 crash record 143 current bin changing 154 current timecode display 140 fixed length recording 141 143 144 locating a clip 141 156 new clip 141 142 preview 141 154 starting 139 timecode generator 151 timecode source indicator 140 timedome 141 156 recording clips 56 142 signals from VHS or U Matic VTRs 307 using crash record 143 M Series User Manual 321 Index 322 using fixed length record 143 Recycle Bin bypassing 242 emptying 242 viewing contents 242 reference video connecting 28 remote control 283 285 control mode selecting 282 control port selecting 282 controller Id setting 282 current and preview clip 279 front panel indicators 280 GPI input 121 Local Remote modes 278 playout using current p
220. ital models only on page 35 Select timecode source on page 36 Select system settings 1 On the Toolbar select System and choose Configuration The Configuration dialog opens 2 On the Configuration dialog select System 32 M Series User Manual The System configuration page appears The settings on this tab apply system wide to all record and play channels 20 April 2005 Select system settings Configuration for iVDR 1 x What is your system video standard oy NTSC 525 Line PAL 625 Line GPI Reference source is present System is locked to reference What is the default unity audio level 0 dB 4dB 8 dB 3 Select the video standard for the 1VDR The 1VDR must be restarted for video standard changes to take effect You ll be prompted to restart when you exit the Configuration dialog box 4 Set the audio reference level for the iVDR 5 Scroll down to locate the question What is your channel compression type Configuration for iVDR 1 x What timing source should the system use for time of day operations Windows clock YITC input Ri LTC input Ri T What is your channel compression type DY25 DY 50 MPEG l frame Cancel 6 Select one of the following compression types e DV25 or DV50 When you make these selections no further compression settings are available or necessary Select OK to save this setting and when prompted
221. ith a brief description of its source destination and status For jobs that have encountered errors they are shown in red You may find more detailed information about a transfer job from its Properties page See e Source The source of the transfer job If the source includes multiple files the first file name is displayed plus a sign beside it You may find the full path of all the source files from the Properties page e Destination The destination of the transfer job You may find the full path of all the source files from the Properties page e Status For ongoing transfer jobs the transfer rate is displayed in megabytes per second and percentage of job completed All jobs waiting in the queue are shown as Pending Jobs that encountered errors are displayed along with an error code You may find a more detailed error message in the Properties page M Series User Manual 269 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Viewing detailed transfer job properties 1 In the Transfer Monitor select a transfer job Clip_1 Properties Source default Clip_2 Dest Cy Temp test4 get Status S 4MB s 50 Abort Source Vi default clip_2 Dest C Temp teste qxt Status 4 7MB s 21 2 In the Transfer Monitor touch or click Properties 3 When the Transfer Job Properties dialog box appears select the Transfer page to examine transfer properties General properties page in ee E Type Clip A L
222. l 189 Chapter amp Working With Playlists Control Description and User Operation List View Context Options Opens the Options dialog box which allows you to select the Menu asset list view e g Text or Image view and choose the list monitoring information displayed in the Playlist application and the Monitor pane See Changing the event list viewing mode on page 194 Insert Event Opens the Insert Event dialog box which allows you to _ insert all event types See Inserting play events on page 196 Insert Event Add Section Adds a section to the end of the list Once you add the section you can move it See Adding and removing sections on Add Section w page 212 New DEDE New List Opens the New List dialog box where you can choose the current bin and specify the new list name before creating it When a Open new list is created the current list is ejected and the new list is created Ron containing one section and no events The default new list name is generated from a seed name and incremented e g if the seed name is List new list names would be List_1 List_2 etc Renaming a list creates a new seed name i e renaming List_1 to Promo causes the next list created to be named Promo_1 See Creating a list on Remove page 196 Open List Closes the current list and allows you to open an existing list See Opening an existing list on page 196 Rename List Rename th
223. l view Rear panel view M 122A M222A Composite R1 amp P ao 220802209 OE eo BORO ORO oF 5058 o Compose eee SDI R2 amp P2 _ a MON Sie P1 OUT 500C R1 IN O 2IN P2OUT P2 OUT Ta IO Oe OQ too 5 o 5 ORONO S ZO ROnCLOL Ss OL6L6 O2080 80802080 LooLoo 0 LOLO0L0LGE6L4262626 a Snore 626256262626 26262562525 OBCHOGOEE 696 aana Ne DODOSO P25 PSPSPS 9695 l l e ee out Q l l l e ee T O E O jul O x Coe OC R1 L QA a Ce Wer S Coe a O Q QO o Ceres Cassese o O Y 2 Tt IEN O oS a FRONT 422 RS422 WN PORT 1 PORT 3 VGA PORT 2 scsi PORT 4 M 222D M322D CMPSTRI amp PI SDIRT amp Pl a vo R1 amp at TEES AUD MON OUT i 6 5 P1 o i l C eo a SCE 2C POLO DLO OLS EEE O oe ORE E oie Renee CMPSTR2 amp P2 SDIR2 amp P2 eo R2 amp cs GPI AY couPosTE LOOP E Q p p ap O 2 AY Cece E gt FRONT RS422 RS422 KS O A PORT 1 PORT 3 VGA PORT 2 SCSI PORT 4
224. lect the Meterbar button b Adjust audio level using the graphical faders 60 60 24 0 10 0 Gang ES 0 0 Unity 20 0 7 40 0 v a1 a2 4 c Select the Meterbar button again to return to Recorder view 4 Select New Clip to create and load a clip 5 To rename the clip select the default clip name then enter a new clip name using the onscreen or external keyboard NOTE Renaming the clip creates a new seed name For example if you rename Clip_I to Promo subsequent clips will be named Promo 1 Promo 2 and so on 6 Select the record button on the front panel or use the onscreen transport controls J The recording progresses until you select Stop Related Topics e Changing video compression settings on page 151 e Selecting the video input type on page 107 e Changing the timecode source on page 152 142 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 To record a clip using crash record To record a clip using crash record Crash record occurs when you start a recording without specifying a clip name The clip is given a default name then the recording continues until you select stop To crash record 1 Select a record channel using the front panel button f or the record channel tab in the Tools pane Ri Recorder 2 In the AppCenter toolbar select Monitor then check the video and audio sources 3 If needed adjust the audio le
225. lecting 105 video disks 66 video input selecting 107 video reference connecting 28 video standard selecting 102 video timing 118 VITC reader setup 110 W web site for Thomson Grass Valley 13 Windows accessing the desktop 32 82 auto logon user accounts 70 taskbar settings default 82 Windows clock as time of day source 104 M Series User Manual 323 Index 324 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005
226. lick or double touch one of the channel monitors That channel is displayed in the single channel view e In single channel view double click anywhere in the channel monitor The multiple channel view is displayed Displaying channel information in full screen mode In both split screen and full screen monitor mode you can show or hide channel information In full screen mode channel information is overlayed at the lower left corner on the video monitor image You can choose to show or hide channel information using Configuration Manager To Show Hide channel information Refer to Configuring the Monitor pane display on page 124 Channel information includes e The asset name If no asset loaded lt no clip loaded gt is displayed e Current timecode e Next clip name Only available in Playlist e Countdown timecode Only available in Playlist 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 135 Chapter 5 Using the Monitor Pane Selecting the channel control application When the M Series 1VDR is started an application is launched for each channel Use the following steps to change the application running on a channel 1 In the AppCenter toolbar select Split Screen O and then Monitor EDAR 14 20155 0c 2 14 30 05 26 14 19 37 10 14 30 05 2 14 20 56 27 lt no clip loaded gt Clip_2 Clip_5 Clip_1 Recorder Player Recorder Clip lt no clip loaded gt Nil Al lei Location 4 NewsCl
227. lip is ejected and a new clip is created before recording begins NOTE Appending previously recorded clips is supported through serial control protocol using either AMP or VDCP Protocol Recorder applications Contact Thomson Grass Valley for more information on control devices available 138 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Starting Recorder Starting Recorder 20 April 2005 When the 1VDR boots an application is launched for each channel From the factory each record channel is configured to run Recorder but if someone has changed this configuration you can use the following steps to reselect Recorder Selecting the Recorder application causes the current record channel application to exit when Recorder is started To start Recorder on a record channel 1 In the AppCenter toolbar select Split Screen 2 In the AppCenter toolbar select Monitor R1 Recorder O P1 Player R2 Recorder O P2 Player Recorder Player Recorder Player 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Recorder Player Recorder Player Recorder Clip lt no clip loaded gt Remote AMP Location local A default Remote BYW Remote YDCP 3 In the Monitor pane select the control application drop down list Recorder for the record channel then choose Recorder Recorder appears in the Applications pane and becomes active M Series User Manual 139 Chapter 6 Recording Clips Guide to using Recorder The
228. lips in the Control view and edit the mark in mark out points the same as a clip provided the unreferenced source media has not been erased If the source media has been erased the subclip retains 1 second of media on each side of the mark in and mark out points See Editing a clip Moving mark in mark out on page 174 The following sections describe how to create subclips e Creating subclips in Subclip mode e About Auto Subclip mode on page 181 e Creating subclips in Cue view Creating subclips in Subclip mode 20 April 2005 You can create subclips from a clip or a continuous record program currently loaded in the Player 1 With a clip or continuous record program loaded in the Player Control view select the Subclip button Subclip MyClip 1 Source INT detault MyClip o In Out Length 00 00 10 08 v ai Gaz 4 The Subclip pane appears with the new subclip loaded and the In and Out buttons flashing The default subclip name follows the form lt source clip name gt lt number gt for example if the source clip name is MyClip the subclip name is MyClip 1 Changing the name of a subclip creates a new seed name until you leave subclip mode For example if you rename subclip Clip_ to Promo and accept the clip M Series User Manual Chapter 7 Playing and Editing 180 M Series User Manual the subsequent subclip will be named Promo 1 Promo 2 and so on All controls
229. lips pane The asset is inserted in the list after the insertion point Select an event in the list as the insert point then select one or more assets in the Clips pane Select Insert in the Clips pane to insert the event after the insert point Select an event in the list as the insert point then select Insert in List view and select one or more assets in the Insert Event dialog box Select OK to insert the events SE a Clip_5 Event Name Clip_1 Cancel Inserting play events in Event view To insert a play event in Event view l 2 20 April 2005 Select the Event button in the Playlist pane Do one of the following Drag and drop an asset from Clips pane then press Event view Insert button to add it to the list Select an asset in the Clips pane and press the New Event button After trimming the event as required select the Event view Insert button to insert the event in the list M Series User Manual 197 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists e Select the New button which opens the New Event dialog box Select an asset in the New Event dialog box then select the OK The event is displayed in the Event view and added to the list is Clip_5 Event Name Clip_1 Cancel Using copy and paste to insert play events Any asset that can be selected can be placed on the clipboard and pasted into another application that accepts that type of asset For example you can copy a play event from Playlist
230. locate the question What is your channel compression type Configuration for iVDR 1 What timing source should the system use for time of day operations Channel Windows clock YITC input Ri GPI LTC input Ri T Panel What is your channel compression type DV25 Hosts DY 50 MPEG frame Cancel 4 Select one of the following compression types e DV25 or DV50 When you make one these selections no further compression settings are available Select OK to save this setting and when prompted restart the 1VDR Restarting is required for the video compression changes to take effect NOTE DV50 is available in M Series model M 322D only e MPEG I frame When you make this selection additional settings are available Proceed to step 5 to complete the MPEG I Frame settings NOTE MPEG I frame compression is not available in the M Series model M 122A 5 Make sure MPEG I frame is selected as instructed previously and then scroll down to display the additional MPEG settings 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 105 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Configuration for iVDR 1 system MPEG settings What is the chroma setting 4 23 23 What is the data rate 18 25 30 40 a0 Pes 50 Mb s More Space Better Quality Record the following range Active picture only Active picture plus VBI Cancel 6 Select the data rate Data rates above 25Mb s are available only in
231. lowing e Select Cut in the asset context menu or e Select Edit in the AppCenter toolbar then choose Cut e Use keyboard shortcut Ctrl X 3 Change the current bin to the target bin Refer to Changing current bin using Look in drop down list on page 230 4 Paste the asset s from the clipboard to the current bin The Paste operation is accessed in the same way as Cut NOTE If an asset is locked or in use it remains in the existing bin while the remaining assets are moved to a new bin with the specified name Using Send To 1 Select the asset s in the Asset List using the front panel touch screen the front panel selection knob or a mouse 2 To open the Send To dialog box using do one of following e Select the Clips pane context menu button Cw then choose Send To or e Select Send To in the asset context menu or e Select the Send To button in the Clips pane If the Send To button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 The Send dialog box appears 3 In the Send dialog box select Move to in the right hand drop list 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 235 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane send V default Clip_ 1 Destination Copy to 04 23 03 12 08 PM Bin Name myom ooe Cancel 4 In the list view select the target bin name Send V deta ult Clip_T x Destination Move to de
232. ly renamed See also Bypassing the Recycle Bin when deleting on page 242 NOTE Assets that are locked or in use cannot be deleted Erasing a clips unused media After editing a clip by moving the mark in mark out points the remaining portion of media outside the marks can be erased to free media storage space If the media outside the clip marks is referenced by a subclip program or event from a playlist that media is not erased Subclips and playlist events retain an extra 1 second of media before and after their mark points to allow some trimming To erase unused media 1 Select the clip in the asset list using the front panel touch screen the front panel selection knob or a mouse 2 Open the Clip Properties dialog box using one of the following e Select the Clips pane context menu button Cw then choose Properties or e Select Properties in the asset context menu or e Select the Properties button in the Clips pane If the Properties button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 239 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane The Clip Properties dialog appears Clip_3 Properties x Name Clip_3 i ai Type clip General Location vs newsclips Marks File In 02 37 06 25 02 37 05 00 Out 02 37 13 256 02 37 15 086 Length 00 00 07 00 00 00 10 06 Erase Unused Media
233. m 7 S7 Audio Input Trim Adjust input trim gain for audio inputs 1 2 Overload clipping Default Cancel 3 Use the slider control to adjust the audio input trim 112 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Adjusting the analog audio input trim The slider control adjusts both audio inputs 1 amp 2 for the selected record channel You can also select Default to return the setting to its factory default value 4 Select OK to save and apply all changes at once Refer to the following sections for other audio levels settings e Setting the audio reference level on page 102 e Guide to using Recorder on page 140 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 113 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Play channel settings Use the following procedures to configure each of your play channels P1 and P2 e Adjusting video output on page 114 e Adjusting video output timing on page 118 e Configuring SDI output embedded audio on page 120 Adjusting video output The settings for video output are displayed on a continuous scrolling page within the Configuration Manager dialog box To work through all the settings simply start at the top and scroll down answering the questions as you go The following procedures explain each setting e Adjusting analog composite output levels on page 114 e Selecting the Jog Still Play mode setting on page 115 e Generating VITC on page 116 e Displayin
234. mport from a file on a network drive you will experience transfer speeds typical for the 100BaseT network However you can reconfigure the iVDR Windows network to use the 1GBaseT network adapter to connect to network drives Refer to the Windows documentation more information Using the 1GBaseT network adapter will provide a faster connection to the mapped drive however the extra network traffic could affect the bandwidth available for streaming network transfers 46 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 100BaseT Configuration tVDR and Profile XP streaming 100BaseT Configuration iVDR and Profile XP streaming The 1VDR supports streaming transfers with other devices such as the Profile XP Media Platform or any device that supports the General Exchange Format GXF as described in SMPTE 360M The Profile XP system must have the optional 100BaseT adapter installed and configured for streaming transfers The 1VDR user interface does not support browsing a non M Series device such as a Profile XP Media Platform In the Send To or Import user interface you must select the non M Series device then specify the target manually by entering the disk volume and bin name e g EX7 default Note that the target path is case sensitive In addition Media Manager does not support the 1VDR which means you cannot browse media on the 1VDR or initiate transfers from Media Manager running on the Profile XP Media Platform All transfers are initiated in
235. n in this chapter includes e Monitor pane overview e Viewing the Monitor pane in full screen mode e Selecting the active channel 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 131 Chapter 5 Using the Monitor Pane 132 Monitor pane overview The Monitor pane allows you to monitor channel status and the video and audio on the record and play channels It also allows you to launch control applications such as Recorder Player and Playlist on the channels The Monitor pane has two display modes split screen and full screen e To view the monitor pane press Monitor in the AppCenter toolbar A R2 Recorder P2 Player Channel ae AF w Tabs Video Monitor Audio Meters lt a a i 14 30 05 26 14 30 05 26 14 20 56 27 lt no clip loaded gt Clip_2 Clip_5 Clip_1 Channel Information Recorder Player er max Channel Clip sno clip loaded gt S Application Location NewsClips Drop List Channel Monitor Properties v A1l a2 Recorder 1 No clip loaded The Monitor pane is composed of four channel monitors which represent the two record channels and the two play channels The channels are named R1 P1 R2 P2 The selected channel monitor is highlighted which indicates the active channel In split screen the four channels are displayed side by side in the upper pane The following table describes the controls and indicators u
236. n only appears in full screen viewing mode SC 00 00 55 06 00 00 09 12 Insert Properties List_1 Section 1 re Goto ae Clg Section 2 Main Player 2 Stopped List_1 Section 1 Clip_3 212 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Moving sections in the list Moving sections in the list To the change the order of sections in a list perform one of the following e Drag and drop the section into another location in the list e Select an section in List view then select the context menu button i and choose Torr the Move Up or Move Down menu item The section moves up or down one position in the list e Use the Edit menu in the AppCenter toolbar or standard keyboard shortcuts to Copy Cut or Paste the section When you paste the section it is inserted after the currently selected section NOTE You can paste sections that you copied from a list running on the other play channel Renaming sections To rename a section 1 Select the section in the List view 2 Open the properties dialog box by doing one of the following e Select the context menu button then choose the Properties e e Select the Properties button Section 1 Properties d Section 1 a a E e General Location i fdefault List_1 GPI Section Num 1 Events a Encl Start Time 01 00 00 00 Duration 00 01 04 221 Pause Ho All Events Repeat 3 Select the section name then enter a new name using th
237. nal 2 Insert the disk you want to make compatible into the CD ROM or DVD drive 3 In AppCenter select System Minimize The Windows desktop appears 4 Do one of the following e Select the CD ROM or DVD drive in Windows Explorer then click File lt CD ROM or DVD drive letter gt Make Compatible OF e In Windows Explorer right click the drive and select Make Compatible in the shortcut menu Explore Open Search Scan for Viruses fey Eject fy Format fy Make Compatible w Use with OLA Sharing Create Shortcut Properties A dialog appears M Series User Manual 95 Chapter 3 Product Description Compatibility Stomp DLA This step will make the disc readable in many drives Press Start to make this disc compatible This operation may take several minutes and it cannot be cancelled once it has begun i Cancel Explain NOTE This operation makes the disk read only If you proceed you can no longer add or modify anything on the disk 5 Select Start to make your disk compatible Depending on the amount of data on the disk this operation may take a few minutes to complete and should not be cancelled once it has begun When the operation completes a message appears Stomp OLA E4 5 Operation Completed 6 Select OK to complete the process You can now use the disk in other devices 96 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration
238. nel to fit flush with the front of the rack To reposition the rack mount brackets 1 Slide the chassis out approximately 10 inches and remove the three mounting screws using Torx tool with a T15 tip Sy D Remove screws p gt Replace B Move bracket toward screws rear and align chassis mounting holes with the nearest bracket mounting holes 2 Move the bracket toward the rear to accommodate rack depth then align the chassis mounting holes with the nearest bracket mounting holes 3 Replace the screws 314 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Rear panel connector pin outs Rear panel connector pin outs The following sections describe 1VDR rear panel connector pinouts RS 422 connector pinouts The RS 422 interface conforms to ANSI SMPTE 207M 1997 standard SMPTE 422 Female 0000 oles JO 9 Pin Signal Description 1 GND Frame Ground 2 TXD Differential Transmit Data low 3 RXD Differential Receive Data high 4 GND Transmit Signal Common 5 NC Spare 6 GND Receive Signal Common 7 TXD Differential Transmit Data high 8 RXD Differential Receive Data low 9 GND Signal Ground LTC connectors pinouts LTC In LTC Out Connector 2 1 Connector male female A A wW 3 3 Pin LTC In Pin LTC Out 1 Signal Ground 1 Signal Ground 2 2 3 3 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 315 Appendix B R
239. nes 6 23 625 Line Reader automatic detection or user selectable line numbers Internal Generator Time of day or user selectable start timecode drop frame or non drop frame IEEE 1394A Input IEEE 1394A Available as a Record channel input for importing and Optional recording media from a digital recording device that uses DV format Selectable video compression formats The following table describes the video compression types available in the M Series 1VDR models Model Compression Types M 122A DV25 M 222A DV25 MPEG2 I frame only up to 25Mb s 4 2 2 M 222D DV25 MPEG2 I frame only up to 25Mb s 4 2 2 M 322D DV25 DV50 MPEG I frame only up to 50Mb s 4 2 2 MPEG D10 Play only 4 2 2 30 40 50 Mb s Input media by import or stream amp Selectable encode range includes active picture or active picture plus VBI Convenient monitoring The front panel display includes on screen video for monitoring the selected channel A front panel headphone jack and rear panel audio monitor output are provided for audio monitoring Both follow the front panel channel selection 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 63 Chapter 3 Product Description Media transfer to other devices The 1VDR supports media transfers over the standard Ethernet port or optional network adapters Supported devices for media transfers include other M Series 1VDRs the Grass Valley Profile XP Media Platform or any de
240. networked device See Sending media to a file or a device on page 262 Asset List Select from three view options Image Text or Details Displays the list of assets located in the current bin Includes the scroll control You can also scroll using the front panel selection knob or up down arrow keys on an external keyboard Touch and hold or use right click with a mouse to open the Asset Context menu See About the asset context menu on page 226 You can change how assets are shown by selecting the view option View options include Image thumbnail Text or Details includes thumbnail and detailed text Modifying the asset list view on page 227 Assets recorded using a different video standard or compression type than the current system setting cannot be loaded and played These assets will appear greyed in the Clips pane asset list Example shows the appearance of a Pal clip when the 1VDR is set to NTSC 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 221 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Terms used in the Clips pane The following table describes the terms used in the Clips pane Asset Description Bin A container used to organize assets similar to a directory or folder on a computer A bin is contained within a disk volume The 1VDR does not support nested bins that is a bin cannot contain another bin Current Bin The current bin functions as the target bin when rec
241. nfiguration Manager dialog opens 2 On the Configuration Manager dialog select System The System configuration settings appear 102 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Selecting Time of day source for event scheduling Configuration for iVDR 1 What is your system video standard oy NTSC 525 Line PAL 625 Line GPI Reference source is present System is locked to reference What is the default unity audio level 0 dB 4dB 8 dB 3 Set the default audio reference level for your system This setting applies to all channels 4 Change other settings as necessary in the Configuration dialog box then select OK to save and apply all changes at once Selecting Time of day source for event scheduling You can set the time of day source used for event scheduling such as automatic play and record events To select the timecode source for recording a clip refer to Changing the timecode source on page 152 To set the time of day source 1 Select System and choose Configuration 2 Select System then open the Time of Day link Close other links or use the scroll button 1f necessary to locate the link 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 103 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Configuration for iVDR 1 What timing source should the system use for time of day operations Channel Windows clock GPI VITC input LTC input Panel What is your channel compression type Hos
242. ng recorded you ll see that the event mark out is set to the timecode of the last frame of video when event was initially created even though the source clip is still recording Thumbnail F se d 4 es a ME ke Geet By default an event uses the same thumbnail as the source clip You can select the thumbnail image to change the event thumbnail image to the current frame or to view the event properties Event In Event Out Event Out Used to change the in and out points of the event These changes do not take effect until the event is inserted into the list using the Insert button in the case of a new event or the changes are accepted using the Accept button in the case of an existing clip Selecting Accept propagates event change to the event in the list Changes to the event are lost if you eject without selecting insert or accept as required Event In Out changes do not affect the source clip s mark in and out values but only the event s marks used by the Playlist 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 193 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Changing the event list viewing mode The event list in the List view has two viewing modes Image view and Text view Image view displays events as thumbnails along with the section and the list time domes The text view lists events descriptions in text format You can select which event attributes are displayed in text view Use the following steps to s
243. ng a clip Moving Mark in Mark OUt cccccseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeaeeeeeseaeeesseaeeeeeas 174 Editing a clip Clearing Mark in Mark OUt cccccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeas 175 Changing the clip thumbnail image ccccccseeceeecceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaessuaaeeeeseeeess 176 Adjusting playback audio level cccccccsecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaaeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeas 176 Selecting the audio monitor SOUICE cece eeccsseeseseeeceeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeeeceeeesuessaeaeeeeeeeees 177 Striping timecode replacing the timecode track cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 177 CHEATING SUD CHO S sce ieee state tee a a hid Stade 179 Creating subclips IN Subelip MOE cccceccccceeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeessaesaaeaeeseeeeees 179 ADUTA SUDIP MOJE orna acces ce caine ad accee ee anata ee 181 Creating SUDCIIPS IN Cue VIEW 0ccceecccccececeeeeeesseseeceeeeeeseaaesaaeeeesseeseeeeeeseeaas 181 Selecting EtO E MmOde xc icxev fetes cal eo teen cca is ah ae ele aces 182 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists WATVOGUC ING Playin Sneed cae deme sie echue in quate sedhychatcariaastekaes cagieasscineleccxaeroeet 184 ESS TORS LISI Cir LAVAS Uae sees ec tac i oe Sse i tc bias Act a aE 185 Tims used IP Playlibs ice ck eee eee eae eed 185 Working with clips currently being recorded ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeesaaeeeees 185 Working With DEOQVAINS iesenii ied sb aie Oe e e
244. ng the record channel and is not intended as a program switch Determining storage capacity Internal media storage can be configured with three or six disk drives depending on the storage option installed A storage option adds three disk drives Storage options available include of 36GB 73GB and 146GB disk drives These storage options can be mixed for example the 1VDR can contain the three 36GB disk option with the three 146GB disk option The following tables show the storage capacity estimates based on the number of disk drives installed and the video data rate The estimates in the table are based on use of four audio channels and one time code channel per video channel using the 525 video format NOTE Storage capacity will increase as larger disk sizes become available Storage capacity estimates in hours using 36 GB drives Video Number of Drives Data Rate 3 18 Mbs 10 hrs 20 hrs 20 Mbs 9 hrs 18 hrs 25 Mbs 8 hrs 16 hrs 50 Mbs 4 hrs 8 hrs Calculated using 1 video track 4 audio tracks 1 timecode track and the 525 video standard 66 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Storage capacity estimates in hours using 73 GB drives Video Number of Drives Data Rate 3 6 18 Mbs 22 hrs 44 hrs 20 Mbs 20 hrs 4O hrs 25 Mbs 16 hrs 32 hrs 50 Mbs 8 hrs 16 hrs Calculated using 1 video track 4 audio tracks 1 timecode track and the 525 video standard Sto
245. nge into effect Select the video input To select the video input of each record channel 1 Select System and choose Configuration then select the Channel button 2 Select the R1 or R2 tab and open the Video Input link Close other links or use the scroll button if necessary to locate the link 3 Locate the question What is your video input type 34 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Select the audio input digital models only Configuration for iVDR 1 T System S7 Video Input What is your video input type Analog Composite 4 Analog composite video is not present SDI Component Analog composite input settings NTSC with Pedestal 7 5 IRE Use Automatic gain control Cancel 4 Make selections as follows e Analog Composite Make this selection to record analog composite video connected to the record channel s Composite input If a warning message 1s displayed about composite signal not present verify that and composite signal is connected When you select Analog composite additional video input settings are available as explained in Record channel settings on page 107 e SDI Component Make this selection to record SDI component video connected to the record channel s SDI input If a warning message is displayed about SDI not present verify that and SDI signal is connected 5 Select OK to save changes or proceed to Select the audio input digital models only
246. nging the timecode source on page 152 Timecode Source i gt The text displayed to the right of current timecode indicates the timecode source VITC LTC or INT internal generator See Changing the timecode source on page 152 Clip Name Edit Control Clip Clip_i Location default Displays the clip s name and location in the media storage system To rename the clip touch or click the Clip Name then use the onscreen or external keyboard to enter text To change the current bin i e the target location for recording clips refer to Changing the current bin on page 154 You can use the Clips pane to manage and organize clips stored on the 1VDR Refer to Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 140 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Guide to using Recorder Control Description and User Operation O Context Menu Options Properties New Clip Preview Locate Help Options Opens the Record channel options dialog box Properties Opens the Properties dialog for the currently loaded clip See Viewing clip properties on page 155 New Clip Used to create and name clip prior to starting the recording A default clip name is generated by incrementing some seed name for example Clip_2 if the last clip created was Clip_1 To rename the clip after or during record select the clip name and enter new name using the onscreen or external keyboard Renaming the clip
247. nse Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Grass Valley can affect emission compliance and could void the user s authority to operate this equipment 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 17 Safety Summaries 18 Canadian EMC Notice of Compliance EN55103 1 2 Class A Warning This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sent appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe A pr scrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada This product has been evaluated for Electromagnetic Compatibility under the EN 55103 1 2 standards for Emissions and Immunity and meets the requirements for E4 environment This product complies with Class A E4 environment In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures FCC Emission Limits This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesirable operation Laser Compliance Laser Safe
248. nternal service or adjustment of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation 1s present Disconnect Power To avoid electric shock disconnect the main power by means of the power cord or if provided the power switch Use Care When Servicing With Power On Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power and remove battery if applicable before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connections Certifications and Compliances Canadian Certified Power Cords Canadian approval includes the products and power cords appropriate for use in the North America power network All other power cords supplied are approved for the country of use FCC Emission Control This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expe
249. ntrols Some button groups are assignable The Play view button group is shown here Holding down a button longer than one second opens a pop up menu which lists the alternative button choices This allows you to customize the user interface to suit you workflow Terms and concepts used in AppCenter 20 April 2005 Active channel Of the four channels there is always one active channel When a channel is active the application controlling the channel is displayed in the Applications pane and the front panel transport controls or keyboard if connected are delegated to controlling that channel There are three ways to select the active channel pressing a channel select button on the front panel selecting a channel tab in the tools pane or pressing a keyboard shortcut Changing the active channel does not disrupt other channels they continue to operate in the background Active pane One of the two panes in AppCenter the Tools or Applications pane is always active The active pane receives input from the front panel or keyboard and mouse The active pane is indicated by the color of the application or tool button in the toolbar White designates the active pane Channel application When AppCenter starts an application is opened to control each channel The channel application for the active channel is displayed in AppCenter s Applications pane See Selecting the channel application on page 78 Assignable
250. ntrols for keyboard mouse and monitor are marked with an asterisk and are provided on the VGA monitor only Ov grass valley Choose record channel 1 A f or a a R Po 0 R2 P210 O Verify video source O SD audio Display split screen 2 Select Monitor view O Rename clip C grass valley my e e EE Load and play the IEAk 3a 16 16 25 45 24 00c00 05 08 clip as explained in a To play a clip O Begin record Stop record or Y or B 56 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 To play a clip To play a clip If your system has no Front Panel you must use a keyboard mouse and monitor rather than the touch panel as illustrated Alternate controls for keyboard mouse and monitor are marked with an asterisk and are provided on the VGA monitor only OV grass valley Select Clips O Choose a clip Da Rotate O Load the clip or ih Out Length Push L 16 15 15 27 16 15 28 26 00 00 12 29 v ai v Press latch and Choose play adjust front panel 2 Display split screen view 3 channel 1 viewing angle fi or Orv grass valley PX of Ja Select Monitor my R2 Pe a Play the clip in Cut Lengih or j E i NGL 5 2 1615 225 DO 2 Tibi ns tee pv Bar pa Monitor audio with headphones 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 57 Chapter 2 Quick Start Procedures To trim a clip If your system has no Front Panel you must
251. ntry Control 8 09 20 23 28 09 20 34 07 00 00 10 08 00 00 03 23 Timecode Entry Control v a1 a2 4 mO Meterbar Button Player 1 Clip_1 playing 1 00 Convention Graphical Description and User Action A horizontal line and arrowhead Select and choose from a list of items in the drop down list Drop down list V default Scroll Button AA v Context Menu Button Ga Eject Button Text Edit Control Clip My Clip Name Timecode Entry Control 00 01 11 09 M Series User Manual Scroll by selecting the up or down arrow on the button At the end of the list the direction arrow is disabled All channel applications have a context menu button Select to choose items from the context menu Select to eject the current clip A horizontal line and small dot Select to open the text entry dialog which includes an on screen graphical keyboard for entering text or use the external keyboard A horizontal line and small dot Select to open the timecode entry dialog box which includes an on screen graphical keypad for entering timecode or use the external keyboard 20 April 2005 Convention E Meterbar Button q Assignable Button Groups Terms and concepts used in AppCenter Graphical Description and User Action Select to toggle between the Meterbar and the application interface The Meterbar contains video and audio meters and the audio level co
252. o four RS422 cables to control 1iVDR channels depending on your remote control needs Connect the RS422 cabling as required then refer to Using Remote Control Protocols on page 277 to configure the iVDR for remote control Connect one or more cables for remote control devices 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 53 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Connecting GPI The 1VDR provides 12 GPI inputs and 12 GPI outputs on a single DB 25 rear panel connector GPI in out FRONT RS422 FRONT RS422 A PORT 1 PORT 3 VGA PORT 2 scsi PORT 4 Also see the following related sections of this manual e GPI I O connector pinouts on page 316 e GPI I O specifications on page 305 e Configuring GPI inputs outputs on page 121 e Using GPI output triggers in playlists on page 200 54 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Chapter 2 Quick Start Procedures 20 April 2005 Quick start procedures in this chapter include To record a clip To play a clip To trim a clip To create a playlist M Series User Manual 55 Chapter 2 Quick Start Procedures To record a clip If your system has no Front Panel you must use a keyboard mouse and monitor rather than the touch panel as illustrated Alternate co
253. o oe Drop down List Recorder Player Recorder Player lt no clip loaded gt o Playlist Remote AMP Remote BYW v aA1 A2 nny gt gt Player 2 No clip loaded Remote YDCP 2 In the Monitor pane select the control application drop down list for the play channel then choose Playlist Playlist starts on the channel and appears in the Applications pane NOTE Also see Starting AppCenter on page 70 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 187 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Guide to using Playlist List View The List View allows you to manage a list insert move or modify events and to control playout of the list Pressing List in the AppCenter toolbar displays the List view You can select the type of display for the asset list text view or image view See Changing the event list viewing mode on page 194 The following describes the basic controls in the List View List view in text display mode Playlist Section Countdown Context Timecode A playlist has at Can display time Menu least one section to next event section or end of list Insert QO section 1 Properties 01 00 00 00 00 00 16 28 Clip_4 01 00 16 28 00 00 31 14 Clip_2 Oa Hee ee PEP ee BP ap a Goto Player 2 Stofped List_1 Section 1 Clip_3 Assignable Time Cursor Event List Text View Buttons Displays the current Default buttons play position are shown
254. ocation V default Transfer Tracks Format Compression Size Length Created Modified Locked 270 M Series User Manual 1 Video 2 Audio 1 Timecode NTSC Hon DropFrame DYI 1105 MBytes 00 05 22 035 05 14 03 04 31 PM 05 14 03 04 36 PM Cancel 20 April 2005 Aborting a transfer job Transfer properties page General Source Y fdefaultclip_2 Destination C Temp Test6 gxt Type Send to File Status Transferring Percent Fah Current Rate 2 4Mb s Average Rate 4 6Mb s Transfer Cancel Aborting a transfer job 1 In Transfer Monitor select a transfer job in the list 2 Select Abort Removing transfer jobs from the completed list You can remove transfer jobs from the Completed page 1 In Transfer Monitor select Completed 2 Remove the transfer jobs using one of the following e Select the job s to remove then select Remove e Select the job s to remove then select Remove All 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 271 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Viewing asset properties The properties dialog box varies depending on the asset e Viewing clip properties on page 272 e Viewing playlist properties on page 273 e Viewing program properties on page 273 e Viewing bin properties on page 274 e Viewing volume properties on page 275 Viewing clip properties 1 Select the clip in the Clips pane asset list using the front panel touch sc
255. ocedures and information about rear panel connector pin outs 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 11 Finding Information Other printed manuals This manual is part of a full set of support documentation you received with your M Series 1VDR eM Series iVDR Quick Start Guide This alll z lt a i gt f guide provides step by step installation 2 We e instructions for basic installation and o amp __ operation including recording and playing ee oe clips trimming clips and making a playlist 5 Lig j i M Series iVDR Release Notes Contains the latest information about the M Series 1VDR software shipped on your system The information in this document includes software upgrade instructions software specifications and requirements feature changes from the previous releases and any known problems M Series iVDR Service Manual Contains information for solving common setup problems as well as information on servicing and maintenance 12 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Getting more information Getting more information In addition to the printed manuals information is available in the following locations On line Help On line help is available through the M Series user interface SERIES Product Description Working with Playlists Configuration Using the Monitor Pane Recording Clips WEET Lale MUGI E Playing and Editing Remote Control Protocols To acces
256. ol then enter the computer name of a peer iVDR Make sure to enter the exact computer name Any differences will result in being unable to connect to the 1VDR Add Host x Enter host name Enter controller id b If you are using remote protocol to perform video network transfers you must use the following steps to add a unique Controller ID for each host otherwise you can ignore this step and proceed to step c Select the Enter controller D text entry control Enter the controller ID of the 1VDR or other networked device then select OK Make sure to enter a number between and 255 that is unique to the iVDR c Select OK in the Add Host dialog box 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 51 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR 5 Repeat step 4 for the remaining iVDRs or other networked devices 6 In the Configuration dialog box select OK to save settings 7 Proceed to Configure the Profile XP static IP address on page 52 Configure the Profile XP static IP address Use standard Windows tools and procedures to configure the IP address on the Profile XP Media Platform or other non M Series device that supports General Exchange Format GXF streaming transfers You must use static IP address and not some automated method of setting IP address such as DHCP Refer to the Profile XP System Guide or the appropriate manual for your non M Series device to setup the network address After config
257. olution 720 X480 525 or 720 X 576 625 Frame Rate 29 97Hz 525 Line or 25Hz 625 Line Audio Sampling 16bit PCM 48Khz sample rate stereo Composite analog video input performance The 1VDR can record signals from most non timebase corrected signal sources such as color under video playback devices 1 e VHS or U Matic VTRs and low cost cameras However for reliable recording performance some devices may require external signal conditioning products 1 e timebase correction 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 307 Appendix A Specifications 308 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Appendix B Rack mounting and Connector Pin outs Rack mounting the iVDR The M Series 1VDR chassis is designed to fit standard rack sizes Adjustable rack mount brackets are attached to the front of the chassis to accommodate different rack depth limitations From the factory the rack mount brackets are mounted in the forward position to allow the front panel to fit flush with the front of the rack The rack mount brackets can be moved toward the rear to accommodate rack depth Rack slide tracks shipped with the iVDR allow sliding in and out without having to remove the unit from the rack If the rack does not already have rack slides installed or if the slides are not correctly positioned you will have to use those shipped with the 1VDR When planning the placement of equipment in your equipment rack bear in mind the following
258. on for iVDR 1 System Rear panel audio monitor output setting Controlled by front panel volume knob Channel a Start recording with the following button s Record only Play Record Full screen monitor mode Single channel monitor Multiple channel monitors Cancel 3 Set the full screen monitor mode e Single channel monitor Active video for the selected channel is displayed full screen filling the entire display area e Multiple channel monitors All four channels are displayed The selected channel monitor displays active video The remaining channel monitors display a still image which updates periodically if there is active video on the channel output 4 Change other settings as necessary in the Configuration dialog box then select OK to save and apply all changes at once M Series User Manual 129 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Adding and removing network host names When you select Hosts the following screen is displayed Configuration for iVDR 1 X Add System Host name Controller id Modify Channel Remove GPI Panel Cancel These settings are used only to configure the 1VDR for streaming media over the network as explained in the procedure Setting up the Ethernet network on page 37 Do not modify these settings unless you are doing so as part of that procedure 130 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Chapter 5 Using the Monitor Pane Informatio
259. on to exit when Player is started To start Player on a play channel 1 In the toolbar select Split Screen and then Monitor R1 Recorder R1 Recorder R1 Recorder O P1 Player O R2 Recorder R2 Recorder i 09 49 19 28 00 00 00 00 00 12 57 04 00 00 00 00 lt no clip loaded gt lt no clip loaded gt lt no clip loaded gt lt no clip loaded gt P2 Player Recorder Player Recorder Player IN 00 00 00 00 clip loaded gt Playlist Remote AMP Remote BYW 4 Remote VDCP 2 In the Monitor pane select the control application drop down list for the play channel then choose Player Player appears in the Applications pane which becomes the active pane M Series User Manual 159 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Guide to using Player Play View The Play view allows you to play a clip modify its name adjust mark in and mark out points create sub clips and stripe timecode Pressing Play in the toolbar shows the Play view The following describes the essential controls in the Play view Assignable clip Clip Name amp Countdown Context Buttons Timecode Current Bin Timecode Menu Default buttons Click clip name Button are shown to rename r Clip Clip i pa a Location W default Subclip 00 30033 Thumbnail Time Dome Mark in amp Meter Bar Click to change Click to select Mark Out Button thumbn
260. only the mark in and mark out cue points are listed Adding a cue point While the clip is playing or in the stop mode use the transport controls to find the desired frame in the clip then do one of the following e Select Add Cue e Select the menu button then choose Add Cue A cue point is added to the cue list using a unique name e g cue_1 NOTE Using the iVDR preview feature you can play and add cue points to a clip while it is still being recorded See Previewing a clip on page 154 Related topics e Jump to the next cue point on page 172 e Removing a cue point on page 171 Removing a cue point 1 In Cue view select a cue point in the list 2 Do one of the following e Select the Remove button or e Select the menu button then choose Remove Cue Jump to the selected cue point Use the following steps to jump to the selected cue point 1 In Cue view select a cue point 2 In Cue view do one of the following e Select the Cue Selection button or e Select the menu button i then choose Cue Selection or e Select the Goto button then select Selected Cue 3 Press the Play button on the front panel or use the onscreen transport controls Play out starts from the cued frame 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 171 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Jump to the next cue point Use the following steps to jump to the next cue point Depending on the current play position the
261. or critical play to air activity e Maximum file sizes when exporting assets to USB drives Exporting assets with long durations may result in file sizes that exceed 4GB Some USB drives are formatted using FAT FAT32 which has the 4GB maximum file size limitation Attempting to send a file to these disk volumes will cause the transfer operation to fail Disk volumes formatted using NTFS allow larger maximum file sizes Before exporting an asset be sure to check that the file size is less than 4GB otherwise ensure that the file system on the target drive supports larger files sizes To send to a file 1 In the Clips pane select the asset s you want to send to a file 2 Open the Send to dialog box using one of the following steps e Select the context menu button then choose Send to or e Select Send to in the asset context menu The Send to dialog box appears Send V default Clip_1 x Destination File Settings Bin Save in C Documents and Settings Stream Q Administrator 1 03 02 10 04 PM All Users 1 03 02 10 04 PM File Name MyClip File Type SMPTE 360M gxf ga 3 Select File then locate and select the destination directory About browsing in the Send to file dialog box The Save in label shows the current destination The list under the Save in label displays the contents of the current destination You can select items in the list such as a machine disk drive or folder to explore its contents
262. or procedures on transferring media NOTE If you have trouble try using the ping utility in the Windows command prompt using either the IP address or host name Troubleshoot as needed Also refer to the M Series Service Manual for troubleshooting procedures Operating with both 100BT and 1GBT network connections If you want to use both the 100BaseT and the 1GBaseT Ethernet connections each adapter can be set up as described in 100BaseT Configuration Data and streaming between 1VDRs on page 38 and 1GBaseT Configuration Data and streaming between iVDRs on page 42 The low speed adapter and high speed adapter are configured independently and each must have its own unique IP address and network setup Dual network adapters can create parallel network paths Parallel network paths occur when the i1VDR is networked with other devices with dual network adapters and those devices are connected to the same 100BaseT and 1GBaseT networks The following describes how the 1VDR handles parallel network paths e Video networking When AppCenter request a streaming transfer the 1VDR will automatically select the highest speed adapter the 1GBaseT adapter for streaming e Windows networking If parallel paths exist between the 1VDR and another networked device the 100BaseT adapter is used for standard windows networking tasks such as file sharing and mapping network drives This means if you are using Send to file or I
263. orded timecode Cue List 12 57 34 00 Mark In 12 57 45 00 cuei 12 58 13 10 cue_3 12 58 33 29 Mark Out Displays a list of cue points that are set for the loaded clip Cue points are listed in chronological order beginning with the mark in point and ending with the mark out point 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 163 Chapter 7 Playing and Editing 164 Control Description and User Operation Countdown Timecode 00 00 03 742 Displays the time remaining in the clip To select the countdown mode you want to monitor open the Options dialog box by selecting Options in the context menu Context Menu Add Cue Remove Cue Rename Cue Create Clip Create All Clips Help E to E Add Cue Creates a cue point at the timecode for the current frame The channel can be in stop or play mode The cue point is added using a default name such as cue_1 See Using Cue points for playback on page 170 Remove Cue removes the selected cue Rename Cue used to rename the selected cue Create Clip Creates a subclip from the currently loaded clip The selected cue point becomes the mark in point while the mark out point is the same as the source clip If more than one cue point is selected a subclip is created using the first and last cue points See Creating Subclips on page 179 Create All Clips Similar to Create Clip but creates a subclip for
264. ording clips or as the source bin when loading clips The current bin contents are listed in the Clips pane The V default bin is created automatically Disk Volume The iVDR has one disk volume located on the internal media drives The internal disk volume is formatted using the iVDR media file system created by using the 1VDR Storage Utility The internal disk volume uses the drive letter V Playlist A sequence of events that can be loaded and played using the Playlist application Playlists are created in the Playlist application by adding clips or programs to a list See Introducing Playlist on page 184 Media Media is the video audio and timecode source material recorded on the disk drives Each media type is stored in it s own file which are referenced by one or more clips for playback Clip A clip references the media files stored on the media drives to allow playback of the video and associated audio and timecode recorded from a single source Deleting a clip deletes the media referenced by the clip only if it is not referenced by another clip You can use the Find Links feature to find related assets See Finding linked assets on page 250 Program Programs are generated from continuous record mode or from a playlist using the Playlist application Programs generated in Playlist include all the media and transitions in the playlist but nothing that breaks the flow of playout such as a pause at the
265. ose the Properties err e Select the Properties button 3 Select All Events to display the End Property Page 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 215 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Section 1 Properties i Section 1 a e General Location Vi fdefaultList_1 GPI Change event pauses End Remove all pauses Add a pause to every event Freeze on last frame Cancel 4 Select the Change event pauses check box then choose the Remove all event pauses option 5 Press the OK button Pauses are removed from all events in the section The section now plays without pausing between any events Managing playlists Managing lists includes the following tasks e Renaming a playlist on page 216 e Selecting the playlist timecode on page 216 e Changing the list thumbnail image on page 217 Renaming a playlist You can rename a playlist using the Clips pane The playlist must be removed from the List application by creating a new playlist or opening an existing one See these related sections to rename a playlist e Creating a list on page 196 e Renaming an asset on page 234 Selecting the playlist timecode The playlist timecode is displayed in the List view toolbar This selection is also used to generate VITC and LTC timecode for the play channel To select the playlist timecode 1 Open playlist properties dialog by performing one of the following L then choose
266. ou can also drag and drop clip onto the Event Name control in the Event View Event Timecode 07 07 25 176 Displays the event s timecode This is the source clip s recorded timecode It may be helpful when searching for a particular portion of the media to set event marks Event Name Control Event Clip_7 Section Section 1 Displays the event s name and section in the list To rename the event touch or click the event name control then use the onscreen or external keyboard to enter a new name If no event is selected when you switch to the Event View the Event Name control displays lt No event loaded gt You can then create a new event or return to the List View The section name that the event belongs to is displayed directly below the event name When viewing an event that is not in the list Section lt Not in list gt is displayed beneath the event name 192 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Guide to using Playlist Event View Control Description and User Operation Countdown Timecode 07 04 59 29 Displays the time to end of event Event View Context Menu New Event Properties Insert Event Locate Goto New Event Opens the New Event dialog box which allows you to navigate through the clips pane to select the source material for the new event Event Properties Opens the Event Properties dialog box which includes pages for setting up list timecode ad
267. p then the iVDR applications start automatically To shutdown or restart 1 In the AppCenter toolbar select System then choose Shutdown in the pop up menu The Shutdown dialog box appears 2 In the Shutdown dialog box choose a shutdown mode using the drop down list then select OK What do you want the system to do Restart Exit To Windows Restart Storage Maintenance Shut Gower 30 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 Dialog box shutdown modes To shutdown or restart Shutdown Mode Description Exit to Windows Exit AppCenter and display the Windows desktop Use the desktop shortcut to restart AppCenter Restart Exit AppCenter and restart the Windows operating system AppCenter will restart automatically Storage Maintenance Mode Exit AppCenter and restart the iVDR in storage maintenance mode to allow maintenance on the media disk subsystem Refer to the M Series Service Manual for procedures Shutdown Shutdown the Windows operating system and power off the iVDR NOTE If you believe your iVDR is hung in an unresponsive state you can perform a forced shutdown by pressing and holding the standby button for approximately five seconds AN WARNING The power standby switch does not turn off power to the system The system must be disconnected from the power source M Series User Manual 31 Chapter 1
268. peed current timecode and audio levels See Configuring the Monitor pane display on page 124 During playback you can monitor the audio for the active channel If the 1VDR has the optional front panel installed you can use the audio jack and volume control to monitor the audio Alternatively there are two rear panel analog audio outputs for monitoring the active channel IniVDRs equipped with digital audio I O 4ch video you can choose which of the two stereo pair to monitor See Selecting the audio monitor source on page 177 Playing a playlist saved as a program Playlists cannot be loaded and played in Player They must be played using Playlist application However you can save a playlist as a program and then play it using Player A program includes all the media and transitions in the playlist but does not include any event that breaks the flow of playout such as a pause When a program is loaded in Player it is handled in the same way as a simple clip as far as Player is concerned For more information on creating programs refer to Saving a list as a program on page 218 158 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Starting Player Starting Player 20 April 2005 Player requires a single play channel If the play channel is currently being used by another application you can use the following steps to select the Player application Selecting the Player application causes the current play channel applicati
269. ps pane context MENU ccccccceececseeseeceeseeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeesseeanaess 224 About the asset context MENU ccccccccecccseseeeeeccaeeeeeeeeeesseaaeeseceesseaeseseesenenas 226 Modifying the asset list VIQW cccccccceccssseeceseeseececeueeececeeueeceseaseesseseaeeecseageesssneaes 227 Selecting Split or Full screen Mode ccceccccceeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeessaeaeeseeeeeeeeeess 229 WOKING WITH DINS nese Sess ioe ha ooeccisk a a ara E e E E a a 230 Changing current bin using Look in drop down list esseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 230 CHANGING SCURFONIE Diiia hos a comets Bs ee e eaa 230 Creating a NEW DIN ccccccccccsseseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeesseseceeeesseesaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseesaeaaas 231 Yee te fre im 9 mere meee re rare mere ore reer Sse a E ate eer eee 232 Renaming DIN Sacsan a beacon mameeeeicamiebenese tied sceebacmueeeteenene 233 VV ONIN WIRI ASSES uia scat Leesa ne pies osuued eat tear atest ia canes eens ierneee 234 Renaming al aS Sel scpesske selec St Soe en see tale EA 234 Selecting multiple assets ceeeeecccccececaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeessueseaaaeseess 234 Moving an asset to another DIN cece ccceccsesceecceeseeeecceuecceceaeeeceseseesseeagsessnaaes 235 Copying anassen a a aredaliNi a onetettaenaee 236 Deleting anmassSel osien E A EE caveats 239 Erasing a clip s unused MECIA cccccccseeeseecceecceeesseececesausaececee
270. pter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane 276 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Chapter 1 0 Using Remote Control Protocols 20 April 2005 Information in this chapter includes About remote control protocol support Making RS 422 and Ethernet connections Starting a remote control protocol application Selecting the control port and control mode Guide to Protocol Recorder Protocol Only mode Guide to Protocol Recorder Local Protocol mode Guide to Protocol Player Protocol Only mode Guide to Protocol Player Local Protocol mode Using Protocol Recorder Local control tasks Using Protocol Player Local control tasks Monitoring remote control communications M Series User Manual 277 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols About remote control protocol support You can use remote control devices and applications software developed for the M Series 1VDR that use industry standard serial protocols For each supported protocol the iVDR provides a protocol specific application The protocol applications shipped with the 1VDR are described in the following table Supported IVDR Protocol Application iVDR Channel Type Required Protocols AMP AMP Recorder Record Channel AMP Player Play Channel VDCP VDCP Recorder Record Channel VDCP Player Play Channel BYW BVW Recorder Record Channel BVW Player Play Channel 4 Advanced Media Protocol
271. r 7 Playing and Editing Loading a clip from Player This procedure allows you to load a clip without hiding the Monitor pane 1 Select a play channel using the front panel button f or the play channel tab in the Tools pane O P1 Player A F 2 In the Play view open the Load Clip dialog using one of the following e Select the Load button in Play view BOCA rini e Select the Play view context menu button then choose Load te k a Load Clip Look in V default Organize Bins os default Clip_1 Eiri Tie al Ne ag am Recycled sag 2 2 i i Ri 2 eee Clip Name Clip_1 Cancel 3 If needed use the Look in drop down list to browse to the desired bin 4 Select a clip in the Load Clip dialog then select OK The clip is loaded in player NOTE The first frame of video is cued on the channel output if play channel is configured for PB mode If E to E mode is selected the corresponding record channel input is displayed until playout is started Refer to Selecting E to E mode on page 182 Related topics e Playing a clip on page 167 e Using Cue points for playback on page 170 166 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Playing a clip Playing a clip Once a clip is loaded in Player you can play the clip or search for a specific frame of video using the transport controls Use the links in the following table to find information playing clips
272. r Space bar to insert a few spaces Now type the machine name such as iVDR 1 followed by the characters he0 to specify network type as IGBT Be sure to use the zero character not the letter o NOTE By default the iVDR host name is the same as the Windows computer name To determine the iVDR computer name right click My Computer on the Windows desktop then properties Select the Network Identification tab and look for the Full computer name Example host file for three 1VDRs on a 1Gb Ethernet network 192 168 99 11 aAVDR L he0 T92 168 99712 IVDR 2 Heg VON 168 9913 1VDR 3 he0 As an example the following shows the content of a default Windows hosts file with the new lines added All lines beginning with a are comments and can be ignored or deleted M Series User Manual Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Copyright c 1993 1995 Microsoft Corp This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP IP for Windows This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to host names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The IP address should be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding host name The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one Space Additionally comments such as these may be inserted on individual lines or following the machine name denoted by a symbol For example 102 54 94 97 rhino acme com source serv
273. r as follows e To save changes complete all your modifications on all Configuration Manager screens then select OK In this way you can put all the changes into effect at once When prompted to change the system settings select Yes Observe progress as the settings are saved to the database and the 1VDR is reconfigured This can take several seconds e To discard changes select Cancel When prompted to discard the changes and exit select Yes 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 99 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Saving and restoring custom iVDR configuration Settings can be saved as a configuration file You can save any number of uniquely named custom configuration files You can load a configuration file to restore 1VDR system settings To save custom settings 1 On the Configuration Manager dialog select the context menu ow and choose Save A Copy The Save As dialog opens save in Desktop ae 4 My My Network My Computer Places Documents File Name MyConfig xml Cancel 2 Use the up arrow or select folders to navigate to the folder in which you want to save the configuration file 3 Enter a name for the configuration file Do not name the file DefaultConfig xml as this name is reserved for the factory default configuration file Otherwise standard Windows 2000 and up file naming restrictions apply 4 Select Save and Close To restore custom settings 1 If you want to save current set
274. r pane select the control application drop down list Player fora channel then choose a protocol application Player protocol applications are available on play channels Recorder protocol applications are available on record channels The protocol application starts on the channel 4 Proceed to Selecting the control port and control mode 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 281 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols Selecting the control port and control mode After starting the protocol application on one of the iVDR channels as described in the previous procedure you must select a control port and the application control mode Protocol control only or Local and Protocol control To configure a protocol application 1 In the Player or Recorder pane select the Options button OTF Loca Remote Protocol Controller Port P4 Control Remote Local Protocol control only Local and Protocol control Cancel 2 Select the remote control port as follows a Temporarily set the Remote Local option to Local and Protocol control b Use the Protocol Controller Port drop down list to choose a remote control port You can select one of the four RS422 ports P1 P4 or the Ethernet port 3 Select the Remote Local control option as required by your control system e Protocol control only Disables local control The 1VDR is controlled only from the remote device The 1VDR display is used to monitor t
275. rage capacity estimates in hours using 146 GB drives Video Number of Drives Data Rate 3 6 18 Mbs 43 hrs 86 hrs 20 Mbs 39 hrs 79 hrs 25 Mbs 32 hrs 65 hrs 50 Mbs 17 hrs 34 hrs Calculated using 1 video track 4 audio tracks 1 timecode track and the 525 video standard Storage capacity estimates in hours using 300 GB drives Video Number of Drives Data Rate 3 6 18 Mbs 86 hrs 173 hrs 20 Mbs 78 hrs 158 hrs 25 Mbs 65 hrs 130 hrs 50 Mbs 34 hrs 68 hrs a Calculated using 1 video track 4 audio tracks 1 timecode track and the 525 video standard 20 April 2005 Determining storage capacity M Series User Manual 67 Chapter 3 Product Description Front view with optional Front Panel The following illustrations show the front view of the M Series 1VDR with the optional Front Panel installed Ov grass valley ofr o D re P2 o in Cut WOO PES a G00 Seo SOOO S OOO OO OO COO COCOOO OOO OO COO OCC OO Lo J joJM Om how Optional Front Panel Drive Bay Door Optional DVD RW Ov grass valley amen Vida g t n Q Length 1400 00 00 15 30 00 004 00 01 30 04 v a Gaz Standby Switch Floppy Drive 68 M Series User Manual Doon WOOC OO COOOOC COOOCS SERIES COCO OOO OO QOC WOO Push the latch to lower the door Drive Bay Door Lowered and In Open Position 20 April 2005 Rear pane
276. ral A CRAD Location v newsclips Marks File 02 37 06 25 02 37 05 00 02 37 13 265 02 37 15 086 Length 00 00 07 00 00 00 10 06 Cancel Viewing Data properties page Allows you to define your own metadata and specify values for that metadata Refer to Working with asset metadata on page 252 Viewing playlist properties Playlist properties dialog box include features that controlling list playback in the Playlist application Refer to Creating a looping list on page 203 to learn about using the playlist properties dialog box Viewing program properties 1 Select the program in the Clips pane asset list using the front panel touch screen the front panel selection knob or a mouse 2 Open the Program Properties dialog box using one of the following e Select the Clips pane context menu button Cw then choose Properties or e Select Properties in the asset context menu or e Select the Properties button in the Clips pane If the Properties button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 273 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Program_T Properties x m fame Program _i Type Program Location default Tracks video 1 Audio 2 TC 1 Format NTSC DropFrame Compression Mpeg Length 00 04 27 27 Created 12 03 03 11 32 4M Modified 12 03 03 11 43 AM The Program
277. rd program The continuous record program cannot be transferred to a file or networked device until record is stopped Continuous record storage space is not reserved Continuous record is allowed to start as long as the record length you enter is less than the available storage however the storage space is not reserved For example you may have enough storage space to start the continuous record but you are still allowed to start a M Series User Manual 145 Chapter 6 Recording Clips 146 recording on another record channel Warning messages are displayed in the AppCenter StatusBar when available storage reaches 10 total disk space All recording is halted at 400MB remaining disk space Pausing the continuous record program in Player You cannot pause the continuous record program in Player indefinitely Eventually the record length is reached and the video at the current position is erased As this happens the current position is advanced in 3 minute increments as the oldest unused media is erased Changing thumbnail image Thumbnail images displayed in the Clips pane are generated using the 16th frame of video The thumbnail image for a continuous record program appears as normal until the fixed length is reached Then the thumbnail will update every 3 minutes as media is erased beginning with the oldest unused media As the media used to generate thumbnails is erased new thumbnails are generated Erasing oldest media
278. reen the front panel selection knob or a mouse 2 Open the Clip Properties dialog box using one of the following e Select the Clips pane context menu button then choose Properties or e Select Properties in the asset context menu or e Select the Properties button in the Clips pane If the Properties button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 The Clip Properties dialog box appears There are three pages in the clip dialog box General Media and Data The General and Media pages are self explanatory The Data page is used to add metadata to the clip To learn more refer to Working with asset metadata on page 252 Viewing the General properties page Clip_3 Properties x Name Clip_3 i ji Type Clip General Location Vv newsclips Media Tracks video 1 Audio 2 TC 1 Format NTSC Non DOropFrame Data Compression DW25 Size 36 MEytes Length 00 00 07 000 Created OF f29 03 09 18 AM Modified OF 30 03 01 57 PM Cancel 272 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Viewing playlist properties Viewing Media Properties page The Media page displays all the relevant clip timecodes including clip marks and the first and last frame of the clip A Time Dome gives a graphical display of the relative position of the marks within the recorded media Clip_3 Properties x taa Mame Clip_3 Sai i Type clip Gene
279. res to learn the basics the 1VDR user interface to accomplish key tasks recording playing trimming and creating playlists Chapter 3 Product Description Provides the product functional description and an introduction to AppCenter the main user interface Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Describes how to modify the M Series 1VDR configuration settings using the Configuration dialog box Chapter 5 Using the Monitor Pane Provides information for using the Monitor pane and for customizing it to suit your workflow Chapter 6 Recording Clips Describes how to use the Recorder application to record clips Chapter 7 Playing and Editing Describes how to use the Player application to play clips trim clips and create subclips Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Describes how to use the PlayList application to create and manage playlists Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane This chapter describes how to use the Clips pane to manage media Learn how to move delete copy import export assets and to create and manage bins directories to organize media Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols Describes how to setup and industry standard remote control protocols to control the M Series 1VDR Appendix A Specifications Describes the mechanical environmental and electrical specifications of the 1VDR Appendix B Rack mounting and Connector Pin outs Contains step by step rack mount pr
280. review 293 protocol applications starting 281 protocol monitor 297 Protocol Player local and protocol control 290 293 protocol control only 288 Protocol Recorder local and protocol control 285 293 protocol control only 283 serial control protocols 71 278 AMP 278 BVW 279 monitoring communications 297 VDCP 279 skipping to preview clip 295 video transfer support requirements 279 removable media 93 262 restarting the 1VDR 30 RS 422 connector pinout 315 rear panel connections 43 53 RS 422 control protocols 278 S safety certification 19 grounding 15 summary 15 terms and symbols 16 Scrub Bar 174 SDI input selecting 107 SDI output disabling embedded audio 120 M Series User Manual searching for assets 244 247 section adding or removing 212 end properties selecting 213 renaming 213 selecting multiple assets 234 send to another device 262 265 file 262 serial control 278 service safety summary 17 shortcuts keyboard 79 shutdown 30 software versions showing 90 specification AC Power 300 electrical 301 mechanical 301 standby switch 30 StatusBar messages types 88 using 87 StatusPane 87 button icons 73 87 copying messages 90 opening 89 still play mode 115 storage capacity video data rate vs disk size 66 Storage Maintenance mode 30 storage time available 141 156 subclips creating from cue points 181 subclips creating 161 179 sub pixels 119 support Grass Valley 14 system video standard
281. rmational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this publication Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 277 7013 or in subparagraph c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Manufacturer is Thomson Broadcast and Media Solutions Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 U S A Rev Date Description September 11 2004 Initial release of the M Series User Manual 071 8228 00 March 19 2004 Updated to include features in version 1 6 071 8322 00 July 6 2004 Updated to include iVDR models M 222D and M 322D and new features in software version 2 0 071 8327 00 April 20 2005 Updated storage capacity estimates 071 8327 01 20 April 2005 Contents Finding Information 000 0 cece ccectteeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesssseeeessstitesssteeeess 11 ADONIS Manual aseena eee es eres ue ret a te al aa ee tla 11 GENO MORE MTOR ALO eega a eas eri cad ecd ate eancncahaueaececabecesce 13 Grass Valley Product SUpport aene a eh eee eh 14 Safety SUMMI
282. rt Settings Control Panel 3 In Control Panel find and double click the Touch Screen Calibration applet 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 85 Chapter 3 Product Description The Calibration Applet window opens 4 On the Calibration tab touch Calibration then follow onscreen instructions to calibrate the touch panel AN CAUTION Do not modify any other settings in the Calibration Applet window These are factory set for optimal performance 5 Touch OK in the Calibration Applet window to exit 6 Close Control Panel 7 Click the maximize button in the AppCenter title bar and test the touch panel Adjusting front panel display brightness You can adjust front panel display brightness for best display depending on ambient light conditions The brightness control is located on the back side of the front panel Enabling the VGA monitor output You can display AppCenter on the VGA monitor output and the optional Front Panel at the same time This allows you to monitor 1VDR operations on a larger display The rear panel VGA monitor connector is disabled at the factory when the optional front panel is installed You can enable the VGA output by connecting an external keyboard and pressing a display mode hot key sequence The following table shows the VGA output hot key sequences for switching between display modes Monitor Mode External keyboard hot key sequence to use Front panel only Ctrl Alt L VGA output only C
283. rtification Standards Standard Designed tested for compliance with ANSIJ UL60950 CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 12 01 2000 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment Third edition IEC 950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment Third edition 1999 EN60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment Third Edition 2000 M Series User Manual 19 Safety Summaries 20 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR 20 April 2005 Procedures in this chapter include Making connections for basic operation VGA Display hot key sequence Powering on and shutting down Configuring for basic operation Verifying basic operation Setting up the Ethernet network Connecting IEEE 1394A Connecting RS422 Connecting GPP M Series User Manual 21 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Making connections for basic operation Connect as shown for recording and playing under local control Refer to sections later in this chapter for other connections such as those for networking and remote operation M 122A M 222A Recorder input connections Recorder 1 Inputs R1 SDI gt ane Composite R1 amp P R1 IN P1 OUT P1 OUT i UT P2 OUT Cmpst Loop Composio 3 m O
284. running on play channel P1 and paste it into Playlist running on play channel P2 You can also copy a clip from the Clips pane and paste it into the Playlist application The Cut Copy and Paste operations are performed by using the AppCenter s Edit menu or by using the standard keyboard shortcuts if an external keyboard is attached CTRL C CTRL X CTRL V To insert an asset from the Clips pane using the clipboard 1 In the Clips pane select one or more assets 2 Copy the assets to the clip board 3 Select an insertion point in the list 4 Paste the asset from the clipboard into the list To use the clipboard to move or copy events already in a play list 1 Select the event s you wish to move or duplicate 2 Copy or Cut the selection to the clipboard 3 Select the new insertion point in the list 4 Paste the event s from the clipboard into the list Related Topics e AppCenter user interface overview on page 72 e Using Keyboard shortcuts on page 79 e Selecting multiple assets on page 234 198 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Inserting a clip that is still recording Inserting a clip that is still recording Clips that are currently recording behave as other clips do in a list except for the following restriction e The event out timecode is set to the last recorded frame at the time the clip is inserted in List view or created in Event view You can move the event out timecode as needed
285. s in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 The rename dialog box appears Edit the asset name using the onscreen or external keyboard the select OK Asset names can contain up to 32 characters including spaces Spaces count as two characters and the following characters are not allowed lt gt single quote double quote and at the beginning of the name The renamed asset is not re sorted NOTE Assets that are locked or in use cannot be renamed Selecting multiple assets There are three ways to select multiple assets in the clips pane When using the touch screen you can turn on the multi select mode in the Edit menu When multi select mode is turned on all the assets you touch or click once are selected To turn off multi select mode you must clear the multi select option in the Edit menu Use the Select All command in the Clips Pane context menu Using mouse and keyboard hold the SHIFT or CTRL key on the keyboard while selecting multiple assets with the mouse or arrow keys 234 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Moving an asset to another bin Moving an asset to another bin There are two ways to move an asset to another bin Using Cut Paste or the Send To dialog box Using the cut and paste commands 1 Select the asset s in the asset list using the front panel touch screen the front panel selection knob or a mouse 2 Cut the asset to the clipboard using one of the fol
286. s online help e In the main user interface toolbar select Tools then choose Help from the pop up menu The M Series Help home page is displayed OF e In any M Series application or tool select the context menu then choose Help Online help for the application is displayed Printed manuals in PDF format All printed manuals are available in the Acrobat file format pdf on the M Series iVDR System Software CD ROM The manuals are located in the CD ROM Documentation directory Thomson Grass Valley Web site This public Web site contains all the latest manuals and documentation and additional support information Use the following URL http www thomsongrassvalley com 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 13 Finding Information Grass Valley Product Support To get technical assistance check on the status of problems or report new problems contact Grass Valley Product Support via e mail the Web or by phone or fax Web Technical Support To access support information on the Web visit the product support Web page on the Grass Valley Web site You can download software or find solutions to problems by searching our Frequently Asked Questions FAQ database World Wide Web _http www thomsongrassvalley com support Technical Support E mail Address gvgtechsupport thomson net Phone Support Use the following information to contact product support by phone during business hours Afterhours phone support is
287. s related to operating the system Injury Precautions Use Proper Power Cord To avoid fire hazard use only the power cord specified for this product Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Do Not Operate Without Covers To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Do Not operate in Wet Damp Conditions To avoid electric shock do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere To avoid injury or fire hazard do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere Avoid Exposed Circuitry To avoid injury remove jewelry such as rings watches and other metallic objects Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Product Damage Precautions Use Proper Power Source Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the voltage specified Provide Proper Ventilation To prevent product overheating provide proper ventilation 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 15 Safety Summaries Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel
288. sania r I il e Select the context menu button then choose the List Properties e Select the list icon in the event list then select the Properties button 2 Select End then choose the Repeat option M Series User Manual 203 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists List_1 Properties x List_1 List Mame Type Location Ys default General Data Repeat Timecode Cancel 3 Select OK to close Locking a list You can lock a list to prevent changes from being made 1 Open the list properties dialog box doing one of the following then choose the List Properties e Select the context menu button e Select the list icon in the event list then select the Properties button 2 Select General then choose the Locked option Mame List_1 Type List Location Ys default Data Video 1 Audio 2 TC 2 NTSC DropFrame DNS Tracks Format Timecode Compression Length sections Events Created Modified End Locked 3 Select OK to close The lock symbol Fi appears next to the list in List view 204 M Series User Manual 00 0104 21 1 3 08 14 2003 09 32 AM 08 14 2003 09 33 AM Cancel 20 April 2005 Modifying events in the list Modifying events in the list Modifying events includes the following tasks e Moving Event In and Event out marks on page 205 e Clearing Event In Event out marks on page 207 e
289. sed in the Monitor pane Control or Indicator Description and User Operation Channel Tab Channel tabs are always displayed in the upper pane even when the pane PI Player is switched to the Clips pane This allows quickly switching to the a ia desired channels The tab labels always display channel names R1 P1 R2 P2 In addition the tab can display one of the following Current Application Name Current Asset Name Current Timecode Countdown Timecode To change the channel tab label refer to Configuring the Monitor pane display on page 124 The color of the LED beside the channel name indicates the channel status as shown Gray An asset is loaded but neither playing or recording Black No asset loaded Red Recording Green Playing S680 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 Monitor pane overview Control or Indicator Description and User Operation Video Monitor a AETA tia C1421155 Le The Video Monitor is used to monitor the video running a selected channel Only the channel monitor of the active channel displays active video The monitors of all other channels display the thumbnail image of the asset loaded Audio Meter The audio meter bars are displayed at the lower right corner of the Video Monitor They indicate the audio input level and remain active when the monitor is not the selected channel Each bar meter represents one
290. seeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaesseeeeseeeeees 93 Formatting CD R RW and DVD diskS cccccceeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeseaeeaeeeeees 93 Reading CD ROMs and DVDs in other iVDRs or computers 00 00eeee 95 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Using Configuration Manager cccccccecceceeceeeeeeeecseceeeeeeeeseeeesaeseeeeeeeeeeessaaaaaeees 98 Opening and closing Configuration Manager ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeaaas 99 Saving and restoring custom IVDR configuration cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 100 Restoring default settings cccccccccseceseeceeeecseeseseeeeeseeeaueceeseesseaeeecesesaesseeeeess 101 Selecting the VIDEO standardirnar N T EE 102 Setting the audio reference level ensena 102 Selecting Time of day source for event scheduling ce cece e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 103 Selecting video Compression errian denen Mat Meese than a oes 105 Record channel SCUINGS xccecteccvssecesceecoctustecense ous magcteneeciesexsandandin dene dideadeacetaqanceeiesceces 107 Configuring the video iNPUt cccccccceecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeseceeeeeeessaeseaeaeeeeseeeees 107 Selecting the audio input for models with digital audio ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeee ee 111 Adjusting the analog audio input trim ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeas 112 Playchannersettings es cece dace sh cetmaccd saab ieanars TA rA a e 114 Adj sting VIDEO OULDU bec
291. ser interface provides an on screen keyboard for text entry entering names and timecode or you can connect a keyboard to the USB port on the front panel The keyboard also provides for keyboard shortcuts for transport control Integrated control applications software The standard control application not only enables a number of simple manual and semi automatic operations previously available with tape but also takes advantage of the capabilities of a disk based recorder e g simultaneous record play list playout clip trimming 1 Features may change with new software releases Be sure to consult the release notes for your software version 62 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Key features Multiple signal I O formats The following table describes the signal I O formats available in the iVDR Refer to Electrical specifications on page 301 for complete specifications Signal I O format Description Video Analog Composite PAL NTSC SDI SDI conforms to SMPTE 259M Audio Analog Audio 2ch video Balanced differential analog sampled 48 KHz 16 bit pcm AES EBU Digital 4 ch video Conforms to SMPTE 276M 1995 Audio Available in models M 222D M 322D only Embedded Audio 4ch video user selectable audio group 1 4 Data format conforms to SMPTE 272M 1994 Available in models M 222D M 322D only Timecode LTC Ich per record channel 1 ch per play channel VITC Lines 10 22 525 Line Li
292. sesaaeeeseeesaaasanss 239 POGKINIG ANA SSO Uses sears croc a a a e E aad ae 241 Working with the Recycle BIN ccccsccccsseceeeceseeeeceeseeeeseaseeessaueeeeessageeesseneeereees 242 Viewing the Recycle Bin contents cceccccssseeeeeceeeeeeecesseeeeeeeeeeeeseesseeeesaaseees 242 EMONG TNs CCV Cle BIN ccciki sexe toc tcceene tis a ea 242 Bypassing the Recycle Bin when eleting ccccccccesssseeseeeeeessaeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeees 242 Locating ASSO S esa a Sei ec ea te en eee ee ik le hee 243 Sorting assets in the Asset List ccccccessesseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeesaaageaeess 243 USINO BASIC SSANCIN sitet feo hese erect een a uae oe ean Diats 244 Viewing recent search re SUlts ccccccssseeeccsenseeeeceeseeecseseeeeeeeaseeessesseeeeseeseees 247 Using Advanced Search cas ale ss ee esl alia dete ce 247 IMG AKC GLAS SOUS mnr se Mile ecais nas sadecs a A eau dle eedccaaeaees 250 Working with asset Metadata ccccccccssseeeccecceeesseeceeeeseeseeceeesseaeeeeeessaansaeeeeeeeaas 252 Adding and modifying asset Metadata cccccccssscceeceeceeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeees 253 Caino M6 lad Ala ienee a E O eetenetecnceadars 255 D l ting asset metadata eiei E E E A E 257 Importing media from a file OF a device ccccccseeeseceeccaeeeeeeeeeeccaeeseeeeeeesaaeeeesseeeaas 258 importing media Trom a fle ok eee ees es E 258 Importing assets from another iVDR or Profile XP systeM
293. sks In local mode the Player user interface operates just like the standard Player application For a full description of all the tasks you can perform using the Player user interface refer to Guide to using Player Play View on page 160 In addition the following sections describe tasks that are unique to the AMP and VDCP protocol player applications e Playout using current and preview clips e Skipping to the preview clip during playout e Jumping to a specific timecode Playout using current and preview clips The AMP and VDCP Player applications use a two head model in that two clips are loaded simultaneously as follows e Current clip The preset id is considered the current clip that controls channel resources 1 e video audio and timecode outputs e Preview clip The preview preset id is considered the preview clip Generally the preview clip begins playing after the current clip completes at which point the preview clip becomes the current clip If you don t need this functionality you can use the protocol player applications just like the standard player loading and playing a single clip See Loading a clip from the Clips pane on page 165 and Playing a clip on page 167 To playout using current and preview clips 1 In the toolbar select the Split Screen button 2 Select a play channel using the front panel button P or the play channel tab in the Tools p
294. t deleted To clear a mark hold ns down the button for longer than one second then choose Clear Mark in the pop up menu Marks are reset to the beginning or end of available media See Editing a clip Moving mark in mark out on page 174 Protocol Monitor Button Appears when a channel is configured for remote control using a remote control protocol applications The button flashes when the application is successfully receiving serial control protocol commands Selecting the button opens the Protocol Monitor pane used to monitor command activity See Monitoring remote control communications on page 297 NOTE The Protocol Monitor dialog will not open until a controller is connected and at least one command set is sent Meter Bar Button Displays the Meterbar which contains the audio play level controls and signal meters Changes to the audio level can be saved with the 4 clip See Adjusting playback audio level on page 176 292 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Using Protocol Recorder Local control tasks Using Protocol Recorder Local control tasks In local control mode you can perform all the tasks locally that are available in the standard recorder application while the record channel is still under remote control For a full description of all the tasks you can perform using the Recorder user interface refer to Guide to using Recorder on page 140 Using Protocol Player Local control ta
295. t not be synchronous Check reference source i 8 19 2003 2 11 38 PM Timing Message Reference monochrome Details The external video reference signal is monochrome Composite video outputs will not be locked to video reference i 8 19 2003 2 11 38 PM Video Message SDI video present Details SDI video source detected on channel R1 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 89 Chapter 3 Product Description Showing iVDR software versions e Select the StatusPane menu button then choose Show Versions Software versions are displayed Copying messages to the clip board 1 Select the message in the StatusPane 2 Select the StatusPane menu button then choose Copy Message After copying the message it can be pasted using standard Windows techniques Clearing messages Clearing messages from the StatusPane removes them from the logging database and the StatusPane This also clears the state of the subsytem indicators so they no longer display the alert and warning symbols e Select the StatusPane menu button then choose Clear Log All messages are removed from the StatusPane and logging database Closing the StatusPane e Select the StatusPane menu button then choose Exit 90 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Exporting log files Exporting log files The procedures in this section describe how to export the M Series 1VDR and Windows operating system log files The M Series 1VDR log files includes all applica
296. t while playing 205 event audio level adjusting 209 clearing marks 207 GPI output triggers adding 200 locating source clip 211 moving marks 205 pausing at end 208 20 April 2005 properties viewing 210 renaming 211 thumbnail changing 209 Event view guide to using 192 feature overview 184 GPI output triggers adding 200 list inserting events 196 locating 218 moving events 210 213 properties viewing 190 203 saving as a program 218 thumbnail changing 217 list timecode selecting 189 list view display options 190 194 List view guide to using 188 list display options 191 locking a list 204 looping a list 203 monitor display options modifying 195 opening an existing list 196 playing a list using GPI input triggers 202 using keyboard shortcuts 202 using onscreen or front panel controls 202 renaming lists 216 saving a list as a program 218 section adding or removing 212 end properties 213 events add pause to all 214 events maximum number 185 events remove pause from all 215 GPI output triggers adding 200 moving 213 renaming 213 selecting list timecode 216 starting 187 symbols used in 186 terms used in 185 time cursor 190 power cords certification 17 power off 30 power on 30 preserving VBI signals 106 previewing a clip 141 154 product damage precautions 15 program 145 184 185 218 Properties 20 April 2005 bin properties viewing 274 clip properties viewing 272 metadata working with 251 playl
297. ted using the 16th frame of video The thumbnail image can be modified in Player Time Dome c gt 00 29 30 24 Progress Only Progress and Available Storage This multi function indicator displays record progress and available storage By default the Time Dome indicates one revolution every 10 seconds or one revolution during a fixed length recording You must switch to local control mode to change the Time Dome display then refer to Displaying available storage space on page 156 O Protocol Monitor Button m si Appears when a channel is configured for remote control using a remote control protocol applications The button flashes when the application is successfully receiving serial control protocol commands Selecting the button opens the Protocol Monitor pane used to monitor command activity See Monitoring remote control communications on page 297 NOTE The Protocol Monitor dialog will not open until a controller is connected and at least one command set is sent M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Guide to Protocol Recorder Local Protocol mode Guide to Protocol Recorder Local Protocol mode The Local and Protocol control mode allows you to control the record channel locally as well as remotely You can select this mode by choosing Local and Protocol control in the Options dialog box See Selecting the control port and control mode on page 282 The following describes the
298. tered on another properties page the metadata name will remain on all properties pages See also Deleting asset metadata on page 257 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Deleting asset metadata Deleting asset metadata You may need to delete a metadata name that is remove it from all properties pages when it becomes obsolete or to repair a typographical error There is no delete metadata feature however metadata names are checked every time you close a properties dialog box If a metadata name is not being used that is no values are entered for the metadata name on any asset properties page the metadata name is automatically deleted and removed from all metadata pages To delete a metadata name you just created 1 In the asset Properties dialog box click Data 2 Select the metadata name you want to delete 3 Click Clear 4 In the Properties dialog box click OK The metadata name is removed from all asset properties pages since no metadata value exists for any asset To delete a metadata name already in use 20 April 2005 To completely purge a metadata name you must clear the metadata value on all asset properties data pages When the last asset 1s cleared and the properties dialog is closed the metadata name is purged and removed from all properties pages Refer to Clearing metadata on page 255 M Series User Manual 257 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Importing media
299. text view or image view Image view displays clip thumbnails along with Time Domes for the list play progress and section play progress To change the view select Options in the context menu M Series User Manual 191 Chapter 8 Working With Playlists Guide to using Playlist Event View The Event View allows you to create a new event before inserting it into the play list or to edit an existing event s properties Selecting Event in the AppCenter toolbar displays the Event view Note that you cannot open Event View while the list is playing The following describes the basic controls in the Event View Event Name amp Section Click to rename Create New Event Current Click to open the new Frame event dialog then select Timecode a clip to make an event Countdown Context Timecode Menu 01 29 59 2W Event Out Length 29 01 38 14 08 00 00 19 17 01 04 59 29 U j Insert or Accept Goto Click to enter goto timecode O Event In Event Out Click and hold Sets the In or Out to change event point to the current thumbnail or view frame event properties Time Dome Thumbnail Note Insert adds new event to the list Accept propagates changes made to an existing event to the event in the list Control Description and User Operation New Event Button Used to create a new event by selecting a clip in the Clips pane then pressing the New Event button Y
300. the List Properties menu item 216 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Changing the list thumbnail image e In List view select the Properties button The List Properties dialog box is displayed 2 Select Timecode in the properties dialog box Name List_1 Type List Location Ys default General Data Display timecode using Start time 01 00 00 00 Timecode Drop irame Cancel 3 Select Drop Frame is needed The drop frame option is available when system timing is set to 525 line standard Drop frame allows the playlist timecode to indicate the actual running time of the list 4 In the Timecode page specify a start time then press OK The start timecode is displayed in the List view toolbar Changing the list thumbnail image The list thumbnail image graphically identifies the list when it appears in the Clips pane or when the List view is set to the image view option By default the list thumbnail is always set to the first play event s thumbnail To change the list thumbnail 1 In the List view select the first play event in the list 2 Select Event to go to Event View 3 Use the front panel or onscreen transport controls locate the video frame to be used for the new thumbnail 4 Select the Event view thumbnail image then select Set Event Thumbnail in the thumbnail pop up menu The first play event and the list now have the same thumbnail 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 21
301. then choose a mode from the pop up menu Signal Status Video and audio status indicators Models equipped with digital Indicators audio display four audio status indicators u 41 gaz Length Select the Length control to enter the clip length then choose record Recording continues until you choose stop or the specified length is reached See To record a clip using fixed length on page 143 Meterbar Button 5 Displays the Meterbar which contains the audio record level controls and signal meters Models equipped with digital audio 4ch video display four audio meters Changes to the audio level are saved for the channel 6 0 6 0 24 0 i 10 0 Gang W xm oO Unity 20 0 40 0 v ai A2 4 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 141 Chapter 6 Recording Clips Recording clips Ways to record a clip e To record a clip using New Clip e To record a clip using crash record e To record a clip using fixed length e To specify clip length after recording has begun To record a clip using New Clip To create and name a clip before recording starts 1 Select a record channel using the front panel button or the record channel tab in the Tools pane At Recorder 2 In the AppCenter toolbar select Monitor then verify the video and audio sources 3 If needed adjust the audio level as follows a In the Recorder pane se
302. timecode files in the media file system Source clip Find the source clip from which a subclip was created Subclips Find all subclips created from the selected clip References When a playlist or program is selected find all the assets that are referenced by the playlist or program When a clip is selected find all the playlists and events that reference that clip Same bin Generate a list of assets that are located in the same bin 4 Select Find Now The results of the link operation are displayed in the asset list The text in the Current Bin label is replaced by a brief summary of the links operation NOTE Unlike the search results link results are not cached You must perform the Links operation to discover linked assets 250 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 20 April 2005 Finding linked assets R1 Recorder P1 Player R2 Recorder P2 Player Look in Links Subclips of Clip_1 System Tools eu Sa Clip 4 1 05 14 03 04 45 PM a a Clip_1 2 05 14 03 04 45 PM Monitor Properti Search M Series User Manual 251 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Working with asset metadata The properties dialog box displays information about an asset as described in Viewing asset properties on page 272 The properties dialog box also includes a user defined metadata feature that allows you to define and add your own information about an asset You
303. tings you should save them as a configuration file before continuing 2 On the Configuration Manager dialog select the menu button then choose Open The Open dialog opens 100 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Restoring default settings Look in Desktop E 32 e My My Network My CustomGentig xml Computer Places Documents File Name CustomConfig xml File Type AllFormats Cancel 3 Use the up arrow or select folders to navigate to the custom configuration file 4 Select the custom configuration file 5 Select Open The custom settings are loaded into Configuration Manager but they are have not been saved and put into effect 6 Click OK to save and apply settings and to close Configuration Manager Restoring default settings You can restore factory default settings as follows e You can restore some individual settings or groups of settings by selecting the Default button which appears below the settings in the configuration screen e You can restore all the settings in Configuration Manager at once to their default values as explained in the following procedure This is useful for test purposes or for removing site specific settings when re installing at a new site To restore all settings at once to their default values 1 If you want to save current settings you should work through the previous procedure Saving and restoring custom 1VDR configuration before proceeding 2 On the
304. tion file However you must use Configuration Manager as the means to save the settings to the database before the settings actually take effect Configuration files are not linked directly to the database You can use configuration files as a means to back up your settings You can also use configuration files to save several different groups of customized settings each with a unique name so that you can quickly load settings for specialized applications Refer to Saving and restoring custom i1VDR configuration on page 100 Refer to the inside front cover of this manual for a quick guide to finding configuration settings The following topics provide instructions on using Configuration Manager e Opening and closing Configuration Manager e Saving and restoring custom 1VDR configuration e Restoring default settings 98 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Opening and closing Configuration Manager Opening and closing Configuration Manager 1 On the Toolbar click System The System menu opens 2 On the System menu choose Configuration Pa O R1 Recorders P1 Player Configuration Manager opens Configuration for iVDR 1 x R1 P1 R2 p2 N gt Audio Input Trim gt Monitor gt Video Input system Cancel 3 Select buttons tabs and links to find settings The Front Panel selection knob can be used to make selections in Configuration Manager 4 Close Configuration Manage
305. tions messages the Windows Event Log and messages related to managing the media file system The exported log files can be sent to Thomson Grass Valley product support where they can be examined to analyze the operation of your 1VDR NOTE Export Log does not export StatusPane messages To capture StatusPane messages refer to Copying messages to the clip board on page 90 Use one of the following procedures to export the log files Exporting log files using the StatusPane 1 Click the StatusPane button ae in the AppCenter StatusBar to open the StatusPane 2 Select the StatusPane menu button then choose Export Log The ExportLog dialog box is displayed ExportLog Destination k Logg Save in Desktop Ge My Computer My Network Places File Name my_i DR_Log In the ExportLog dialog box browse to locate the destination directory Select the File Name edit control then enter a file name for the exported log file Use the Logs tab to select the log files to export Select Export When the export confirmation message appears click OK oOo N A a A WW Retrieve the log files and send them to Thomson Grass Valley support for analysis 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 91 Chapter 3 Product Description Exporting log files using the Windows command line This procedure allows you to export log files even if AppCenter does not start properly It uses the Windows command prompt 1 If yo
306. to Timecode dialog appears 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 295 Chapter 10 Using Remote Control Protocols Goto Timecode x 09 20 30 14 Clear Back Back Space Select to enter a relative timecode a Absolute Select to enter an absolute timecode Clear Select to clear entry 2 Enter a timecode value using one of the following e To enter a relative timecode value select the or key enter timecode then select Ok e To enter an absolute timecode value select the key enter timecode then select Ok e Select and drag the Scrub Bar uu while monitoring play channel output then click Ok to close 296 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Monitoring remote control communications Monitoring remote control communications The Protocol Monitor button is displayed in the AppCenter StatusBar when a protocol application is running on aniVDR channel The button flashes when any channel is receiving remote control messages Clicking the button opens the Protocol Monitor dialog box which you can use to determine which channels are receiving messages NOTE The Protocol Monitor dialog will not open until a controller is connected and at least one command set is sent To open the Protocol Monitor dialog box e Click the Protocol Monitor button in the AppCenter StatusBar The dialog box displays the channel number and protocol being used along with the port number and control mode
307. to open then select Open Before the list is opened the currently loaded list is closed Renaming a list To rename a list in Playlist Select the context menu button amp then choose Rename List Inserting play events A new list contains one section and no events When you start inserting play events they will be played in the order you insert them You can move events in the list up or down or insert new events between existing ones by selecting the insertion point Selecting the insertion point e When using the Insert button or menu item the insertion point is after the currently selected event e When using the drag and drop method you will see a drop cursor as you drag the event over the list The drop cursor indicates where the new event will be inserted 196 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Inserting play events in List view NOTE The time cursor only indicates the current play position and cannot be selected and moved Selecting and dragging may inadvertently select and move the event Inserting play events in List view To insert an event in List view l 2 Select List in the Playlist pane Do one of the following Drag and drop assets from the Clips pane using the drop cursor to locate the insertion point Drag and drop from the Monitor pane Select the thumbnail or video image then drag to List view Use the drop cursor to locate the insertion point Double click an asset in the C
308. to tilt the front panel to the optimal working angle for your installation Gp Press latch Cleaning the touch screen The front surface of the touch screen should be kept free of dirt dust finger prints and other materials that could degrade optical properties Long term contact with abrasive materials will scratch the front surface and image quality will be detrimentally affected For best results use a clean damp non abrasive cloth towel and any commercially available window cleaner to regularly clean the surface The cleaning solution should be applied to the towel rather than the surface of the touch screen Many touch screens have air vents and are not designed with water tight bezels Fluid ingress may occur from behind the panel if it is not cleaned properly Calibrating the front panel touch screen You can calibrate the touch screen to optimize its performance The front panel can be tilted to a convenient operating angle or removed and operated as a desktop device using an optional 15 foot extension cable and cradle Calibration may enhance operation after the angle of the touch panel is changed or when the front panel has been removed and extended to operate as a desktop device using the optional 15 foot extension cable and front panel cradle To calibrate the touch screen 1 In the AppCenter toolbar touch System then choose minimize in the pop up menu The Windows desktop appears 2 In the Windows taskbar touch Sta
309. trl Alt C Front panel and VGA output Ctrl Shift C Configure screen resolution in Windows for 640x480 for full screen display 86 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Monitoring the system using the StatusBar Monitoring the system using the StatusBar The StatusBar located across the bottom of the AppCenter window is used to display system and applications messages In addition the StatusBar includes several tool buttons as described in the following table Player 2 Playing List_10 Section 1 Clip_2 Status Messages Protocol StatusPane i Button actin Transfer Monitor Button Tool Name Description Protocol Monitor This button appears when a channel is configured for remote control using aremote control protocol application The Protocol Monitor button flashes when any protocol application is successfully receiving serial control protocol commands Clicking on the Protocol Monitor button opens the Protocol Monitor dialog box which shows the specific channel s receiving messages Monitoring remote control communications on page 297 ae Transfer Monitor Appears during a file transfer or import export operation Selecting the button opens the Transfer Monitor pane See Guide to using the Transfer Monitor on page 267 StatusPane Always appears on the StatusBar however the button symbol changes i depending on the system status See Interpreting StatusPane b
310. ts DY25 MPEG frame Cancel 3 Select one of the following sources e Windows clock This is the local Windows operating system clock If you select this source you should verify that the clock s time is correct To do this follow the procedure Accessing the Windows desktop on page 32 and use standard Windows procedures e VITC input This is the VITC timecode embedded in the selected record channel s video input Select the drop down list then choose one of the record channels RI R2 If a warning message about missing VITC is displayed make sure your rear panel connection and source video are correct before proceeding e LTC input Select the drop down list then choose one of the record channel LTC inputs RI R2 4 Change other settings as necessary in the Configuration dialog box then select OK to save and apply all changes at once 104 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Selecting video compression Selecting video compression The video compression selection is a system wide setting All record and play channels are set to the same compression type You can only play clips that use the compression type currently selected To select the video compression type 1 On the Toolbar select System then choose Configuration The Configuration Manager dialog opens 2 On the Configuration Manager dialog select System The System configuration settings appear 3 Scroll down to
311. tt A a ER 65 Determining storage capacity ccccecceccccsseeecceeeeeeccueeeeeceeueeeessueeeesssueeessnaaeeessaess 66 Front view with optional Front Panel ccccccccccceseeeceeceeseeceeeeeeeeeseeseesseaneeesansees 68 RearpanelVieW esiaren a hernia coach a 69 Gude to Using APPC ENE naaa a el ell eaten eee 70 SIHT APPC ENE Ponsa a hc sucuastaahelesesneidscaneaaiad 70 AppGenter COntrol 0plons Locsin nve ee y E a a 71 AppCenter user interface OVervieW cccccccccceeccaeecaeeeeeeeeeeeesessseeaeesseeeeeeeeess 72 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual Contents Standard channel applications included in AppCeniter cc csccceeeeeeeeeeeees 74 OOS Meded VAD DC ENEP cascada esc EE E EE EA 75 Conventions used in the AppCenter interface cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 76 Terms and concepts used in AppCenter cc cceccseeeeceeceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaas 77 Selecting the Channel application c ccccccceccccccceceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeseaeeeeeseeeeees 78 Displaying on screen transport controls ccccceeeceecseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeecseeeeseeaaees 78 Using Keyboard SROMCUIS Ae c2 2stacsetycesscue denen sarutdpaets cee cteeanc ubscsens banter iousiesuecransueuutee ce 79 Accessing the Windows CeSKtODP cccccccceeeseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeesaeeeeseeeeesseaeeeseenenas 82 Windows Taskbar default Se ttinGS cccccccccccecssssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseeeeeesen
312. ty Requirements Laser Safety M Series User Manual The device used in this product is a Class certified laser product Operating this product outside specifications or altering its original design may result in hazardous radiation exposure and may be considered an act of modifying or new manufacturing of a laser product under U S regulations contained in 21CFR Chapter 1 subchapter J or CENELEC regulations in HD 482 S1 People performing such an act are required by law to recertify and reidentify this product in accordance with provisions of 21CFR subchapter J for distribution within the U S A and in accordance with CENELEC HD 482 S1 for distribution within countries using the IEC 825 standard Laser safety in the United States is regulated by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH The laser safety regulations are published in the Laser Product Performance Standard Code of Federal Regulation CFR Title 21 Subchapter J The International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard 825 Radiation of Laser Products Equipment Classification Requirements and User s Guide governs laser products outside the United States Europe and member nations of the European Free Trade Association fall under the jurisdiction of the Comit Europ en de Normalization Electrotechnique CENELEC 20 April 2005 Safety Certification This product has been evaluated and meets the following Safety 20 April 2005 Ce
313. u have not already done so connect a mouse and keyboard to the 1VDR using the rear panel ports or the ports on bottom edge of the Front Panel 2 In the Windows task bar select Start Run 3 Type the following in the Run dialog box then click OK c profile exportlog The ExportLog dialog box is displayed Save in Desktop Places File Name my_i DR_Log In the ExportLog dialog box browse to locate the destination directory Select the File Name edit control then enter a file name for the exported log file Use the Logs tab to select the log files to export Select Export When the export confirmation message appears click OK O Oo N A Nn A Retrieve the log files and send them to Thomson Grass Valley support for analysis 92 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Writing data to the CD R RW and DVD drives Writing data to the CD R RW and DVD drives The following procedures explain how to use the iVDR CD ROM drive or the optional DVD drive to store and transport data on removable media disks The DVD drive supports DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW and CD R RW disk formats This section includes e Formatting CD R RW and DVD disks e Reading CD ROMs and DVDs in other 1VDRs or computers Formatting CD R RW and DVD disks You must format the CD R RW or DVD disk media before you can use it in the iVDR disk drives The 1VDR includes the software for doing this formatting NOTE Transferring iVD
314. uipment Further configuration is available in the Playlist application to assign the GPI output to an event or section Refer to Using GPI output triggers in playlists on page 200 NOTE If you want to play a list that was created on another play channel you must ensure that GPI triggers assigned to the play channels use the same names otherwise the GPI triggers will not occur Using identical GPI naming also allows copying and pasting sections and events between lists To configure GPI output signals 1 Select System and choose Configuration then select the GPI button 122 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 A Configuring GPI outputs Select the Output tab The GPI Output settings open OA aa A W Configuration for iVDR 1 Input Output k system 3 GPLOuti Take Channel cprout 2 GProut 2 cerout3 GPrOUt3 cerout4 Prout Ra Con RR Channel s Name Take Active High Pulse Width 60 fields Select a GPI output signal 1 12 Use the scroll control as necessary Select the channel you want to trigger the GPI output Select the Name text entry control and enter a name for the action Set the active signal high low and pulse width 60 100 fields required This is determined by the external equipment connected to the GPI output Repeat step 3 through step 6 for the remaining GPI outputs Select OK on the Configuration dialog or leave the Configuration
315. uring the Profile XP IP address proceed to the next procedure Test the network Test the network Refer to Importing assets from another 1VDR or Profile XP system on page 260 and Sending assets to another machine on page 265 for procedures on transferring media NOTE If you have trouble try using the ping utility in the Windows command prompt using either the IP address or host name Troubleshoot as needed Also refer to the M Series Service Manual for troubleshooting procedures 52 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Connecting IEEE 1394A Connecting IEEE 1394A The 1VDR provides an optional IEEE 1394A interface for importing DV based video and audio from a digital recording device The iVDR record channel transport controls can be used to control the remote device The 1VDR supports one 1394A input Refer to Using IEEE 1394 Record mode on page 148 J OS GPIO N Audio MON Out Ge o F l oO Po Hip S 1394A Input D l Optional R2 a a R2 Wan 2 Q Q Q 5 Q Q Note a mT oe Bre i The iVDR supports a ee ee one IEEE 1394 input Connecting RS422 You can control the 1VDR with remote control devices and software developed for the 1VDR that use industry standard serial protocols You can connect up t
316. ust terminate the signal if you are not connecting the loop through to another device AUDMON OUT CMPST R2 amp P2 SDIR2 amp P2 Stee ee R2 amp on 5 R2IN P2OUT1 P2OUT2 11 CH1 2 SAL PI composi E 00 FRERE OL aooo 30 5 Of OHO GEHEGIEPGPEP Og O OMG OO 9525262652626 252528652 Bee O ICY O O Ono ge Audio MON Out GPIO N gt 2 pee JP INLE P2 LTC P2 CH1 P2 CH2 Cp p M 222D M322D C gt R2 3 G9 IC only Cera al CH2 O i m beza beza O E i oO ae a FRONT RS422 FANEL PORT 1 SCSI RS422 PORT 3 PORT 4 1394 28 M Series User Manual M 122A M 222A Reference in out Reference in out OR 75 Q terminator Reference in out Reference in out OR 75Q terminator 20 April 2005 Power connection Power connection Connect the power cable as shown Composite R1 amp P Pare OD RAS PISTEEN Composite R R1 IN P1 OUT P1OUT R1IN P1OUT P1OUT R2IN P2 OUT OO O G F O a m jf S me O OC T a VGA Display hot key sequence 20 April 20
317. ut copy paste and multiple item select Properties Transport Controls Statusbar Split Fullscreen es view buttons Displays the active pane full screen Recorder 1 Clip_1 recording Main components in the AppCenter user interface The following describes the main components in AppCenter s split screen view AppCenter Component Description Tools Pane Displays either the Clips pane or Monitor determined by selecting the corresponding button in the toolbar Can be viewed full screen hiding the Applications pane Applications Pane Displays the control application for the active channel The active channel is determined by selecting the corresponding channel tab or channel select button on the Front Panel Can be viewed full screen hiding the Tools pane Toolbar Contains the buttons used to control AppCenter Channel Select Tabs Used to select the active channel The active channel receives input from Transport Controls the touch screen front panel controls or mouse and keyboard Used to control record and playback Transport controls do not appear when the front panel is used StatusBar Displays status and error messages and includes tool buttons for opening Transfer Monitor StatusPane or the Protocol Monitor dialog box 72 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 AppCenter user interface overview Moving the AppCenter window When the 1VDR display resolution is set to
318. ut Range NTSC 525 lines 0 1715 clock samples PAL 625 lines 0 1727 clock samples e Analog sub pixels SC This setting applies to analog video only Delays the timing within one sample interval Output delay adjustments affect the SDI and composite analog outputs together The analog sub pixel adjustment is only a fine trim on the composite output with respect to the current SDI timing Video output timing adjustments take effect immediately without closing the Configuration dialog box 3 Select OK to close and save changes M Series User Manual 119 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration Configuring SDI output embedded audio In iVDR models equipped with digital audio you can specify the embedded audio group for the SDI output You can also disable embedded audio to remove the signal from the SDI output To select the embedded audio group 1 Select System and choose Configuration then select the Channel button 2 Select the P1 or P2 tab then open the Audio Output link Configuration for iVDR 1 R1 Mpi 4 R2 SZ Audio Output Select one embedded audio group Group 1 Disabled gt Video Output Timing Cancel 3 Choose the Audio Group 1 4 using the Audio group drop down list Selecting Disable removes the embedded audio signal from the SDI output 4 Select OK to close and save changes 120 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Configuring GPI inputs outputs Configuring GPI inp
319. utdown and restart Windows 5 If you are going to stream video between i1VDRs proceed to Add network hosts names for streaming on page 39 otherwise the 1VDR is ready for standard data networking tasks Add network hosts names for streaming 20 April 2005 You must add the host names of all peer1VDRs on the network that support streaming transfers Adding host names is required to allow selection of networked 1VDRs in the AppCenter user interface and to provide a successful network connection for streaming The host names added will appear in the Import and Send to dialog boxes NOTE By default the iVDR host name is the same as the Windows computer name To determine the iVDR computer name right click My Computer on the Windows desktop then properties Select the Network Identification tab and look for the Full computer name In addition if you are using remote protocol to perform video network transfers you ll need to assign a unique Controller ID number for each host name If you are not using remote protocol for network transfers you can leave the Controller Id blank To add a network host names 1 Start AppCenter if it is not already running using the desktop shortcut 2 In AppCenter toolbar select System then choose Configuration 3 Select the Hosts button The network host names are displayed M Series User Manual 39 Chapter 1 Installing the M Series iVDR Configuration for iVDR 1
320. uts outputs The 1VDR provides 12 GPI inputs and 12 GPI outputs on a single DB 25 rear panel connector The following sections describe how to configure the GPI inputs and outputs e Configuring GPI inputs e Configuring GPI outputs Configuring GPI inputs You can assign the GPI inputs to control one or more channels and the action you want the iVDR channel s to take The 1iVDR channel can be set to respond to active high or low GPI signals To configure GPI input signals 1 Select System and choose Configuration then select the GPI button 2 Select the Input tab The GPI Input settings open Configuration for iVDR 1 Input k Output FF GPLIn 1 Channel a GPI In 2 erin erin system erns Trigger Channel s Trigger Action Active Cancel 3 Select a GPI input 1 12 Use the scroll control as necessary 4 Select the channel or channels that you want triggered by the input signal 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 121 Chapter 4 Modifying Configuration 5 Select the action drop down list and choose a pre defined action from the list Trigger actions include the following Trigger Action Description Play Play current loaded clip or playlist in assigned Player channel VAR playback Plays loaded clip in VAR mode with pre set speed as set in Configuration Manager Record Start recording a clip in assigned Recorder channel Stop
321. utton icons on page 87 Interpreting StatusPane button icons The StatusPane button always appears in the StatusBar The button icon changes depending on the status of the trap messages Selecting the StatusPane button opens the StatusPane which is used to view and manage status messages logged on the system Icon Name Description a Default All warnings and alert messages have been cleared A Warning There is at least one warning message and no alert messages O Alert There is at least one uncleared alert message 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 87 Chapter 3 Product Description Message types displayed in the StatusBar The following table describes the message types that appear in the StatusBar Typically the StatusBar message area displays application status messages for the active channel however if a problem develops with the software application or a hardware subsystem an error message is momentarily displayed and the symbol for the StatusPane button changes Message Type Example Message Application Clip loaded clip recording no clip loaded Status Message Application Error Media disks are full Cannot record the clip Message Trap Summary The system drive is at full capacity Disk recorder Message operations will fail Delete unused or temporary assets and restart disk recorder 88 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Using the StatusPane Using the StatusPane
322. vel as follows a In the Recorder pane select Meterbar button b Adjust audio level using the graphical faders Gang Unity v a1 a2 4 c Select the Meterbar button again to return to Recorder view 4 Select the record button on the front panel or use the onscreen transport controls EBD The recording progresses until you select Stop To record a clip using fixed length You can specify the clip length before recording or during recording Fixed length recording continues until the clip length is reached or until you select stop To specify clip length before recording 1 Select a record channel using the front panel button f or the record channel tab in the Tools pane f n1 Recorde _ 2 In the AppCenter toolbar select Monitor then verify the video and audio sources 3 Select Length in the Recorder pane The Length dialog box appears 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 143 Chapter 6 Recording Clips Length x 4 Using the onscreen keypad or external keyboard enter the clip length by typing only numbers colons are added automatically 5 Choose Ok in the dialog box or Enter on the external keyboard 6 Select the record button on the front panel or use the onscreen transport controls J Recording continues until Stop is selected or the desired length is reached While recording the mark in and mark out update with the current status of the clip The Time Dome
323. ves Auto Subclip mode eliminates the Accept step in the subclip procedure To create a subclip you simply set mark in then set mark out On setting mark out the subclip is automatically generated and ejected and a new subclip name is loaded in the subclip pane Auto Subclip mode is useful when you want to create subclips while a source clip is playing You simply load a clip press play then create subclips by selecting In Out In Out etc To enable Auto Subclip mode e In the Play view select the context menu button then choose Auto Subclip Creating subclips in Cue view In Cue view you can automatically create a subclip from the selected cue point The selected cue point becomes the mark in point while the mark out point is the same as the source clip If more than one cue point is selected a subclip is created using the first and last cue points This feature allows you to manage the media of interest as a separate clip rather than media between cue points in a clip For example once you ve made a subclip it can be added to a playlist By default subclips generated from the cue list are given names of the format lt clip name gt lt first cue name gt For example a subclip generated from a cue point named cue_1 in a clip named MyClip is named MyClip cue_1 If a clip already exists with this name you are prompted to enter a unique name To create a subclip from media between two selected cu
324. vice that supports SMPTE 360M streaming transfers You must configure the 1VDR network settings prior to attempting media transfers Media file exchange using standard media file formats You can exchange media with other devices by importing and exporting files using standard file formats such as AVI DV and General Exchange Format GXF as described in SMPTE 360M Files can be exchanged over a network connection or common forms of removable media such as CD RW DVD RW optional Remote control support You can use remote control devices and applications software developed for the M Series iVDR that use industry standard serial protocols For each supported protocol the 1VDR provides a protocol specific application Supported protocols includes VCDP or AMP protocols over RS422 or Ethernet GPI triggers GPI input triggers can be assigned to channels to control actions such as record play stop and skip a playlist event GPI output triggers can be defined for channels and inserted in playlists to control external equipment as the list is played 64 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Functional description Functional description The diagram illustrates how the four i1VDR channels operate independently but share a common internal disk storage area This gives all channels two record channels for recording media and two play channels for playing media simultaneous random access to the same media files This means that you
325. way as Copy NOTE If an asset is locked or in use it remains in the existing bin while the remaining assets are moved to a new bin with the specified name Using Send To 1 Select the asset s in the Asset List using the front panel touch screen the front panel selection knob or a mouse 2 To open the Send To dialog box using do one of following e Select the Clips pane context menu button v then choose Send To or e Select Send To in the asset context menu or e Select the Send To button in the Clips pane If the Send To button is not displayed in the Clips pane refer to assignable buttons in Guide to using the Clips pane on page 220 The Send dialog box appears 3 In the Send dialog box select Bin then Copy to in the left hand drop list 20 April 2005 M Series User Manual 237 Chapter 9 Managing Media Using Clips Pane Send V default Clip_1 Destination Copy to 04 23 03 12 08 PM Bin Name mybin Encel 4 In the list view select the target bin name Send V deta ult Clip_T Destination Move to defaut 04 23 03 12 08 PM lt 1 mybin 04 23 0312 08PM__ Recycle Bin Bin Name mybin Cancel 5 Select the Send button to close the Send dialog box and copy the file NOTE Copy ts a background task and can be monitored using the Transfer Monitor Refer to Guide to using the Transfer Monitor on page 267 238 M Series User Manual 20 April 2005 Deleting an
326. yout P2 10 42 716 75 00 00 26 1141 gt clip Clip_1 Load a ae FE k e ee te Location M QaA3 default Options P 5 C In Out Length Goto 10 42 16 15 10 42 42 27 00 00 26 12 Oo 00 26 11 v G ai A 4 AMP Player 2 Clip_1fRead Onhyy cued 6 Start current clip playout using your remote control device or software When the current clip playout reaches its mark out point it is ejected and the preview clip is promoted to current clip and begins to play NOTE You can toggle between current and preview clip thumbnails at anytime to identify the preview clip without affecting current clip playout 7 Load a new preview clip see step 5 to continue uninterrupted playout Skipping to the preview clip during playout During playout you can skip to the preview clip e Select the Goto button in the player toolbar then choose the Skip to Preview in the pop up menu The play channel begins to play the preview clip Jumping to a specific timecode The Goto Timecode dialog allows you to jump to the specific timecode in the current clip You can enter absolute timecode values based on recorded timecode or relative timecode values To jump to a specific timecode 1 Open the Goto Timecode dialog box using one of the following e Select the Goto button in the player toolbar then select the Timecode menu item e Select the context menu button in player then choose Goto Timecode The Go

M-Series User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents